| 1 |
767 |
jeremybenn |
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
| 2 |
|
|
%
|
| 3 |
|
|
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
| 4 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
| 5 |
|
|
%
|
| 6 |
|
|
\def\texinfoversion{2009-08-14.15}
|
| 7 |
|
|
%
|
| 8 |
|
|
% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
|
| 9 |
|
|
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
|
| 10 |
|
|
% 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
| 11 |
|
|
%
|
| 12 |
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
|
| 13 |
|
|
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
| 14 |
|
|
% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
|
| 15 |
|
|
% License, or (at your option) any later version.
|
| 16 |
|
|
%
|
| 17 |
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
| 18 |
|
|
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
| 19 |
|
|
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
| 20 |
|
|
% General Public License for more details.
|
| 21 |
|
|
%
|
| 22 |
|
|
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
| 23 |
|
|
% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
| 24 |
|
|
%
|
| 25 |
|
|
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
|
| 26 |
|
|
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
|
| 27 |
|
|
% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
|
| 28 |
|
|
%
|
| 29 |
|
|
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
| 30 |
|
|
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
| 31 |
|
|
% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
|
| 32 |
|
|
% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
|
| 33 |
|
|
% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
|
| 34 |
|
|
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
|
| 35 |
|
|
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
| 36 |
|
|
%
|
| 37 |
|
|
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
|
| 38 |
|
|
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
| 39 |
|
|
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
| 40 |
|
|
%
|
| 41 |
|
|
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
| 42 |
|
|
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
| 43 |
|
|
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
| 44 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
| 45 |
|
|
% texindex foo.??
|
| 46 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
| 47 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
| 48 |
|
|
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
|
| 49 |
|
|
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
|
| 50 |
|
|
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
| 51 |
|
|
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
| 52 |
|
|
%
|
| 53 |
|
|
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
|
| 54 |
|
|
% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
|
| 55 |
|
|
% full Texinfo distribution.
|
| 56 |
|
|
%
|
| 57 |
|
|
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
|
| 58 |
|
|
|
| 59 |
|
|
|
| 60 |
|
|
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
| 61 |
|
|
|
| 62 |
|
|
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
| 63 |
|
|
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
| 64 |
|
|
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
| 65 |
|
|
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
| 66 |
|
|
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
| 67 |
|
|
|
| 68 |
|
|
|
| 69 |
|
|
\chardef\other=12
|
| 70 |
|
|
|
| 71 |
|
|
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
|
| 72 |
|
|
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
| 73 |
|
|
\let\+ = \relax
|
| 74 |
|
|
|
| 75 |
|
|
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
|
| 76 |
|
|
\let\ptexb=\b
|
| 77 |
|
|
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
| 78 |
|
|
\let\ptexc=\c
|
| 79 |
|
|
\let\ptexcomma=\,
|
| 80 |
|
|
\let\ptexdot=\.
|
| 81 |
|
|
\let\ptexdots=\dots
|
| 82 |
|
|
\let\ptexend=\end
|
| 83 |
|
|
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
| 84 |
|
|
\let\ptexexclam=\!
|
| 85 |
|
|
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
| 86 |
|
|
\let\ptexgtr=>
|
| 87 |
|
|
\let\ptexhat=^
|
| 88 |
|
|
\let\ptexi=\i
|
| 89 |
|
|
\let\ptexindent=\indent
|
| 90 |
|
|
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
|
| 91 |
|
|
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
| 92 |
|
|
\let\ptexless=<
|
| 93 |
|
|
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
|
| 94 |
|
|
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
|
| 95 |
|
|
\let\ptexplus=+
|
| 96 |
|
|
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
| 97 |
|
|
\let\ptexslash=\/
|
| 98 |
|
|
\let\ptexstar=\*
|
| 99 |
|
|
\let\ptext=\t
|
| 100 |
|
|
\let\ptextop=\top
|
| 101 |
|
|
{\catcode`\'=\active
|
| 102 |
|
|
\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex.
|
| 103 |
|
|
\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
|
| 104 |
|
|
|
| 105 |
|
|
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
| 106 |
|
|
% starts a new line in the output.
|
| 107 |
|
|
\newlinechar = `^^J
|
| 108 |
|
|
|
| 109 |
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
| 110 |
|
|
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
| 111 |
|
|
%
|
| 112 |
|
|
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
| 113 |
|
|
\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
|
| 114 |
|
|
\else
|
| 115 |
|
|
\def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
| 116 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 117 |
|
|
|
| 118 |
|
|
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
| 119 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
| 120 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
| 121 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
| 122 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
| 123 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
| 124 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
| 125 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
| 126 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
| 127 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
| 128 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
| 129 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
| 130 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
| 131 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
| 132 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
| 133 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
| 134 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
| 135 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
| 136 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
| 137 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
| 138 |
|
|
%
|
| 139 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
| 140 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
| 141 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
| 142 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
| 143 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
| 144 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
| 145 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
| 146 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
| 147 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
| 148 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
| 149 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
| 150 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
| 151 |
|
|
%
|
| 152 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
| 153 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
| 154 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
| 155 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
| 156 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
| 157 |
|
|
|
| 158 |
|
|
% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
|
| 159 |
|
|
\chardef\spacecat = 10
|
| 160 |
|
|
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
|
| 161 |
|
|
|
| 162 |
|
|
% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
|
| 163 |
|
|
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
|
| 164 |
|
|
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
|
| 165 |
|
|
\chardef\dashChar = `\-
|
| 166 |
|
|
\chardef\dotChar = `\.
|
| 167 |
|
|
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
|
| 168 |
|
|
\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
|
| 169 |
|
|
\chardef\questChar = `\?
|
| 170 |
|
|
\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
|
| 171 |
|
|
\chardef\semiChar = `\;
|
| 172 |
|
|
\chardef\underChar = `\_
|
| 173 |
|
|
|
| 174 |
|
|
% Ignore a token.
|
| 175 |
|
|
%
|
| 176 |
|
|
\def\gobble#1{}
|
| 177 |
|
|
|
| 178 |
|
|
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
|
| 179 |
|
|
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
| 180 |
|
|
|
| 181 |
|
|
% Hyphenation fixes.
|
| 182 |
|
|
\hyphenation{
|
| 183 |
|
|
Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
|
| 184 |
|
|
ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
|
| 185 |
|
|
data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
|
| 186 |
|
|
man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
|
| 187 |
|
|
par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
|
| 188 |
|
|
spell-ing spell-ings
|
| 189 |
|
|
stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
|
| 190 |
|
|
wide-spread wrap-around
|
| 191 |
|
|
}
|
| 192 |
|
|
|
| 193 |
|
|
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
| 194 |
|
|
\newdimen\bindingoffset
|
| 195 |
|
|
\newdimen\normaloffset
|
| 196 |
|
|
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
| 197 |
|
|
|
| 198 |
|
|
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
| 199 |
|
|
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
| 200 |
|
|
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
| 201 |
|
|
%
|
| 202 |
|
|
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
|
| 203 |
|
|
|
| 204 |
|
|
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
| 205 |
|
|
% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
| 206 |
|
|
% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
| 207 |
|
|
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
| 208 |
|
|
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
|
| 209 |
|
|
%
|
| 210 |
|
|
\def\|{%
|
| 211 |
|
|
% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
| 212 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
| 213 |
|
|
%
|
| 214 |
|
|
% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
| 215 |
|
|
\vadjust{%
|
| 216 |
|
|
% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
| 217 |
|
|
% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
| 218 |
|
|
\vskip-\baselineskip
|
| 219 |
|
|
%
|
| 220 |
|
|
% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
| 221 |
|
|
% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
| 222 |
|
|
\llap{%
|
| 223 |
|
|
%
|
| 224 |
|
|
% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
| 225 |
|
|
\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
| 226 |
|
|
%
|
| 227 |
|
|
% This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
| 228 |
|
|
\hskip 12pt
|
| 229 |
|
|
}%
|
| 230 |
|
|
}%
|
| 231 |
|
|
}
|
| 232 |
|
|
|
| 233 |
|
|
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
| 234 |
|
|
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
| 235 |
|
|
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
|
| 236 |
|
|
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
|
| 237 |
|
|
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
|
| 238 |
|
|
%
|
| 239 |
|
|
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
| 240 |
|
|
\def\loggingall{%
|
| 241 |
|
|
\tracingstats2
|
| 242 |
|
|
\tracingpages1
|
| 243 |
|
|
\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
|
| 244 |
|
|
\tracingparagraphs1
|
| 245 |
|
|
\tracingoutput1
|
| 246 |
|
|
\tracingmacros2
|
| 247 |
|
|
\tracingrestores1
|
| 248 |
|
|
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
| 249 |
|
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
|
| 250 |
|
|
\tracingscantokens1
|
| 251 |
|
|
\tracingifs1
|
| 252 |
|
|
\tracinggroups1
|
| 253 |
|
|
\tracingnesting2
|
| 254 |
|
|
\tracingassigns1
|
| 255 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 256 |
|
|
\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
|
| 257 |
|
|
\errorcontextlines16
|
| 258 |
|
|
}%
|
| 259 |
|
|
|
| 260 |
|
|
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
|
| 261 |
|
|
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
|
| 262 |
|
|
%
|
| 263 |
|
|
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
|
| 264 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
|
| 265 |
|
|
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
|
| 266 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
|
| 267 |
|
|
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
|
| 268 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
|
| 269 |
|
|
|
| 270 |
|
|
% For @cropmarks command.
|
| 271 |
|
|
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
| 272 |
|
|
%
|
| 273 |
|
|
\newif\ifcropmarks
|
| 274 |
|
|
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
| 275 |
|
|
%
|
| 276 |
|
|
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
| 277 |
|
|
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
| 278 |
|
|
%
|
| 279 |
|
|
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
| 280 |
|
|
\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
|
| 281 |
|
|
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
|
| 282 |
|
|
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
| 283 |
|
|
|
| 284 |
|
|
% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
|
| 285 |
|
|
% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
|
| 286 |
|
|
% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
|
| 287 |
|
|
%
|
| 288 |
|
|
% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
|
| 289 |
|
|
% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
|
| 290 |
|
|
%
|
| 291 |
|
|
% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
|
| 292 |
|
|
% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
|
| 293 |
|
|
% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
|
| 294 |
|
|
% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
|
| 295 |
|
|
% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
|
| 296 |
|
|
% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
|
| 297 |
|
|
\def\domark{%
|
| 298 |
|
|
\toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
|
| 299 |
|
|
\toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
|
| 300 |
|
|
\toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
|
| 301 |
|
|
\toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
|
| 302 |
|
|
\toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
|
| 303 |
|
|
\mark{%
|
| 304 |
|
|
\the\toks0 \the\toks2
|
| 305 |
|
|
\noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
|
| 306 |
|
|
\noexpand\else \the\toks8
|
| 307 |
|
|
}%
|
| 308 |
|
|
}
|
| 309 |
|
|
% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
|
| 310 |
|
|
% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
|
| 311 |
|
|
% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
|
| 312 |
|
|
% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
|
| 313 |
|
|
% first @chapter.
|
| 314 |
|
|
\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
|
| 315 |
|
|
\ifcase0\topmark\fi
|
| 316 |
|
|
\ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
|
| 317 |
|
|
}
|
| 318 |
|
|
\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
|
| 319 |
|
|
\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
|
| 320 |
|
|
|
| 321 |
|
|
% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
|
| 322 |
|
|
\def\lastchapterdefs{}
|
| 323 |
|
|
\def\lastsectiondefs{}
|
| 324 |
|
|
\def\prevchapterdefs{}
|
| 325 |
|
|
\def\prevsectiondefs{}
|
| 326 |
|
|
\def\lastcolordefs{}
|
| 327 |
|
|
|
| 328 |
|
|
% Main output routine.
|
| 329 |
|
|
\chardef\PAGE = 255
|
| 330 |
|
|
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
| 331 |
|
|
|
| 332 |
|
|
\newbox\headlinebox
|
| 333 |
|
|
\newbox\footlinebox
|
| 334 |
|
|
|
| 335 |
|
|
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
| 336 |
|
|
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
| 337 |
|
|
\def\onepageout#1{%
|
| 338 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
| 339 |
|
|
%
|
| 340 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
| 341 |
|
|
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
| 342 |
|
|
%
|
| 343 |
|
|
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
| 344 |
|
|
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
| 345 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
|
| 346 |
|
|
\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
| 347 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
|
| 348 |
|
|
\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
| 349 |
|
|
%
|
| 350 |
|
|
{%
|
| 351 |
|
|
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
| 352 |
|
|
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
| 353 |
|
|
% before the \shipout runs.
|
| 354 |
|
|
%
|
| 355 |
|
|
\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
| 356 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
| 357 |
|
|
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
| 358 |
|
|
% We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
|
| 359 |
|
|
% \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
|
| 360 |
|
|
% "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
|
| 361 |
|
|
% it needs to be
|
| 362 |
|
|
% {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
|
| 363 |
|
|
\shipout\vbox{%
|
| 364 |
|
|
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
|
| 365 |
|
|
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
|
| 366 |
|
|
%
|
| 367 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
| 368 |
|
|
\hsize = \outerhsize
|
| 369 |
|
|
\vskip-\topandbottommargin
|
| 370 |
|
|
\vtop to0pt{%
|
| 371 |
|
|
\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
| 372 |
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
| 373 |
|
|
\line{%
|
| 374 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
| 375 |
|
|
\hfill
|
| 376 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
| 377 |
|
|
}%
|
| 378 |
|
|
\vss}%
|
| 379 |
|
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin
|
| 380 |
|
|
\line\bgroup
|
| 381 |
|
|
\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
| 382 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
| 383 |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
| 384 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 385 |
|
|
%
|
| 386 |
|
|
\unvbox\headlinebox
|
| 387 |
|
|
\pagebody{#1}%
|
| 388 |
|
|
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
| 389 |
|
|
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
| 390 |
|
|
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
|
| 391 |
|
|
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
| 392 |
|
|
\vskip 24pt
|
| 393 |
|
|
\unvbox\footlinebox
|
| 394 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 395 |
|
|
%
|
| 396 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks
|
| 397 |
|
|
\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
| 398 |
|
|
\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
| 399 |
|
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
| 400 |
|
|
\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
| 401 |
|
|
\vbox to0pt{\vss
|
| 402 |
|
|
\line{%
|
| 403 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
| 404 |
|
|
\hfill
|
| 405 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
| 406 |
|
|
}%
|
| 407 |
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
| 408 |
|
|
\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
| 409 |
|
|
}%
|
| 410 |
|
|
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
| 411 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 412 |
|
|
}% end of \shipout\vbox
|
| 413 |
|
|
}% end of group with \indexdummies
|
| 414 |
|
|
\advancepageno
|
| 415 |
|
|
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
| 416 |
|
|
}
|
| 417 |
|
|
|
| 418 |
|
|
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
| 419 |
|
|
|
| 420 |
|
|
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
| 421 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@ =11
|
| 422 |
|
|
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
| 423 |
|
|
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
| 424 |
|
|
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
| 425 |
|
|
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
| 426 |
|
|
\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
|
| 427 |
|
|
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
| 428 |
|
|
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
| 429 |
|
|
}
|
| 430 |
|
|
|
| 431 |
|
|
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
| 432 |
|
|
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
| 433 |
|
|
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
| 434 |
|
|
%
|
| 435 |
|
|
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
| 436 |
|
|
\def\nstop{\vbox
|
| 437 |
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
| 438 |
|
|
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
| 439 |
|
|
\def\nsbot{\vbox
|
| 440 |
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
| 441 |
|
|
|
| 442 |
|
|
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
| 443 |
|
|
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
| 444 |
|
|
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
| 445 |
|
|
%
|
| 446 |
|
|
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
|
| 447 |
|
|
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
|
| 448 |
|
|
\def\argtorun{#2}%
|
| 449 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 450 |
|
|
\obeylines
|
| 451 |
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
| 452 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 453 |
|
|
\parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
|
| 454 |
|
|
}
|
| 455 |
|
|
|
| 456 |
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
| 457 |
|
|
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
| 458 |
|
|
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
| 459 |
|
|
\argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
|
| 460 |
|
|
}%
|
| 461 |
|
|
}
|
| 462 |
|
|
|
| 463 |
|
|
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
|
| 464 |
|
|
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
|
| 465 |
|
|
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
|
| 466 |
|
|
|
| 467 |
|
|
% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
|
| 468 |
|
|
%
|
| 469 |
|
|
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
|
| 470 |
|
|
% @end itemize @c foo
|
| 471 |
|
|
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
|
| 472 |
|
|
% by \finishparsearg.
|
| 473 |
|
|
%
|
| 474 |
|
|
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
|
| 475 |
|
|
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
|
| 476 |
|
|
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
|
| 477 |
|
|
\def\temp{#3}%
|
| 478 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty
|
| 479 |
|
|
% Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
|
| 480 |
|
|
\let\temp\finishparsearg
|
| 481 |
|
|
\else
|
| 482 |
|
|
\let\temp\argcheckspaces
|
| 483 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 484 |
|
|
% Put the space token in:
|
| 485 |
|
|
\temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
|
| 486 |
|
|
}
|
| 487 |
|
|
|
| 488 |
|
|
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
|
| 489 |
|
|
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
|
| 490 |
|
|
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
|
| 491 |
|
|
% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
|
| 492 |
|
|
% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
|
| 493 |
|
|
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
|
| 494 |
|
|
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
|
| 495 |
|
|
%
|
| 496 |
|
|
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
|
| 497 |
|
|
%
|
| 498 |
|
|
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
|
| 499 |
|
|
|
| 500 |
|
|
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
|
| 501 |
|
|
% is roughly equivalent to
|
| 502 |
|
|
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
|
| 503 |
|
|
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
|
| 504 |
|
|
%
|
| 505 |
|
|
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
|
| 506 |
|
|
% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
|
| 507 |
|
|
|
| 508 |
|
|
\def\parseargdef#1{%
|
| 509 |
|
|
\expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
|
| 510 |
|
|
}
|
| 511 |
|
|
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
|
| 512 |
|
|
\def#2{\parsearg#1}%
|
| 513 |
|
|
\def#1##1%
|
| 514 |
|
|
}
|
| 515 |
|
|
|
| 516 |
|
|
% Several utility definitions with active space:
|
| 517 |
|
|
{
|
| 518 |
|
|
\obeyspaces
|
| 519 |
|
|
\gdef\obeyedspace{ }
|
| 520 |
|
|
|
| 521 |
|
|
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
| 522 |
|
|
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
| 523 |
|
|
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
| 524 |
|
|
% should produce a line of output anyway.
|
| 525 |
|
|
%
|
| 526 |
|
|
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
|
| 527 |
|
|
|
| 528 |
|
|
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
| 529 |
|
|
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
| 530 |
|
|
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
| 531 |
|
|
\gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
|
| 532 |
|
|
}
|
| 533 |
|
|
|
| 534 |
|
|
|
| 535 |
|
|
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
| 536 |
|
|
|
| 537 |
|
|
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
|
| 538 |
|
|
%
|
| 539 |
|
|
% \envdef\foo{...}
|
| 540 |
|
|
% \def\Efoo{...}
|
| 541 |
|
|
%
|
| 542 |
|
|
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
|
| 543 |
|
|
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
|
| 544 |
|
|
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
|
| 545 |
|
|
% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
|
| 546 |
|
|
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
|
| 547 |
|
|
%
|
| 548 |
|
|
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
|
| 549 |
|
|
% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
|
| 550 |
|
|
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
|
| 551 |
|
|
% special case.)
|
| 552 |
|
|
|
| 553 |
|
|
|
| 554 |
|
|
% At run-time, environments start with this:
|
| 555 |
|
|
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
|
| 556 |
|
|
% initialize
|
| 557 |
|
|
\let\thisenv\empty
|
| 558 |
|
|
|
| 559 |
|
|
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
|
| 560 |
|
|
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
| 561 |
|
|
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
| 562 |
|
|
|
| 563 |
|
|
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
|
| 564 |
|
|
\def\checkenv#1{%
|
| 565 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 566 |
|
|
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
| 567 |
|
|
\else
|
| 568 |
|
|
\badenverr
|
| 569 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 570 |
|
|
}
|
| 571 |
|
|
|
| 572 |
|
|
% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
|
| 573 |
|
|
\def\badenverr{%
|
| 574 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| 575 |
|
|
\errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
|
| 576 |
|
|
not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
| 577 |
|
|
}
|
| 578 |
|
|
\def\inenvironment#1{%
|
| 579 |
|
|
\ifx#1\empty
|
| 580 |
|
|
out of any environment%
|
| 581 |
|
|
\else
|
| 582 |
|
|
in environment \expandafter\string#1%
|
| 583 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 584 |
|
|
}
|
| 585 |
|
|
|
| 586 |
|
|
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
| 587 |
|
|
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
|
| 588 |
|
|
%
|
| 589 |
|
|
\parseargdef\end{%
|
| 590 |
|
|
\if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
|
| 591 |
|
|
\else
|
| 592 |
|
|
% The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
|
| 593 |
|
|
\expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
|
| 594 |
|
|
\csname E#1\endcsname
|
| 595 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 596 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 597 |
|
|
}
|
| 598 |
|
|
|
| 599 |
|
|
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
| 600 |
|
|
|
| 601 |
|
|
|
| 602 |
|
|
%% Simple single-character @ commands
|
| 603 |
|
|
|
| 604 |
|
|
% @@ prints an @
|
| 605 |
|
|
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
|
| 606 |
|
|
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
|
| 607 |
|
|
|
| 608 |
|
|
% This is turned off because it was never documented
|
| 609 |
|
|
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
|
| 610 |
|
|
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
|
| 611 |
|
|
%% but suppressing ligatures.
|
| 612 |
|
|
%\def\`{{`}}
|
| 613 |
|
|
%\def\'{{'}}
|
| 614 |
|
|
|
| 615 |
|
|
% Used to generate quoted braces.
|
| 616 |
|
|
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
|
| 617 |
|
|
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
|
| 618 |
|
|
\let\{=\mylbrace
|
| 619 |
|
|
\let\}=\myrbrace
|
| 620 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 621 |
|
|
% Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
|
| 622 |
|
|
% and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
|
| 623 |
|
|
\catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
|
| 624 |
|
|
\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
| 625 |
|
|
\catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
|
| 626 |
|
|
!gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
|
| 627 |
|
|
!gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
|
| 628 |
|
|
!gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
|
| 629 |
|
|
!gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
|
| 630 |
|
|
!endgroup
|
| 631 |
|
|
|
| 632 |
|
|
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
|
| 633 |
|
|
\let\comma = ,
|
| 634 |
|
|
|
| 635 |
|
|
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
| 636 |
|
|
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
|
| 637 |
|
|
\let\, = \c
|
| 638 |
|
|
\let\dotaccent = \.
|
| 639 |
|
|
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
| 640 |
|
|
\let\tieaccent = \t
|
| 641 |
|
|
\let\ubaraccent = \b
|
| 642 |
|
|
\let\udotaccent = \d
|
| 643 |
|
|
|
| 644 |
|
|
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
|
| 645 |
|
|
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
|
| 646 |
|
|
\def\questiondown{?`}
|
| 647 |
|
|
\def\exclamdown{!`}
|
| 648 |
|
|
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
|
| 649 |
|
|
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
|
| 650 |
|
|
|
| 651 |
|
|
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
| 652 |
|
|
\def\imacro{i}
|
| 653 |
|
|
\def\jmacro{j}
|
| 654 |
|
|
\def\dotless#1{%
|
| 655 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 656 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
|
| 657 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
|
| 658 |
|
|
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
| 659 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
| 660 |
|
|
}
|
| 661 |
|
|
|
| 662 |
|
|
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
|
| 663 |
|
|
% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
|
| 664 |
|
|
%
|
| 665 |
|
|
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
|
| 666 |
|
|
|
| 667 |
|
|
% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
|
| 668 |
|
|
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
|
| 669 |
|
|
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
|
| 670 |
|
|
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
|
| 671 |
|
|
% \scriptscriptstyle).
|
| 672 |
|
|
%
|
| 673 |
|
|
\def\LaTeX{%
|
| 674 |
|
|
L\kern-.36em
|
| 675 |
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
|
| 676 |
|
|
\vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
|
| 677 |
|
|
\kern-.15em
|
| 678 |
|
|
\TeX
|
| 679 |
|
|
}
|
| 680 |
|
|
|
| 681 |
|
|
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
| 682 |
|
|
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
| 683 |
|
|
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
| 684 |
|
|
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
| 685 |
|
|
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
| 686 |
|
|
{\catcode`@ = 11
|
| 687 |
|
|
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
| 688 |
|
|
% if the definition is written into an index file.
|
| 689 |
|
|
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
| 690 |
|
|
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
| 691 |
|
|
}
|
| 692 |
|
|
|
| 693 |
|
|
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
| 694 |
|
|
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
| 695 |
|
|
|
| 696 |
|
|
% @* forces a line break.
|
| 697 |
|
|
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
| 698 |
|
|
|
| 699 |
|
|
% @/ allows a line break.
|
| 700 |
|
|
\let\/=\allowbreak
|
| 701 |
|
|
|
| 702 |
|
|
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
| 703 |
|
|
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
| 704 |
|
|
|
| 705 |
|
|
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
| 706 |
|
|
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
| 707 |
|
|
|
| 708 |
|
|
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
| 709 |
|
|
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
| 710 |
|
|
|
| 711 |
|
|
% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
|
| 712 |
|
|
%
|
| 713 |
|
|
\def\onword{on}
|
| 714 |
|
|
\def\offword{off}
|
| 715 |
|
|
%
|
| 716 |
|
|
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
|
| 717 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 718 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
|
| 719 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
|
| 720 |
|
|
\else
|
| 721 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| 722 |
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
|
| 723 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
| 724 |
|
|
}
|
| 725 |
|
|
|
| 726 |
|
|
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
| 727 |
|
|
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
| 728 |
|
|
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
| 729 |
|
|
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
| 730 |
|
|
|
| 731 |
|
|
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
| 732 |
|
|
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
| 733 |
|
|
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
| 734 |
|
|
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
| 735 |
|
|
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
| 736 |
|
|
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
| 737 |
|
|
% the text is small, which looks bad.
|
| 738 |
|
|
%
|
| 739 |
|
|
% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
|
| 740 |
|
|
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
|
| 741 |
|
|
% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
|
| 742 |
|
|
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
|
| 743 |
|
|
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
|
| 744 |
|
|
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
|
| 745 |
|
|
%
|
| 746 |
|
|
\newbox\groupbox
|
| 747 |
|
|
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
|
| 748 |
|
|
%
|
| 749 |
|
|
\envdef\group{%
|
| 750 |
|
|
\ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
|
| 751 |
|
|
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
| 752 |
|
|
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
| 753 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 754 |
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
| 755 |
|
|
%
|
| 756 |
|
|
\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
|
| 757 |
|
|
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
| 758 |
|
|
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
| 759 |
|
|
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
| 760 |
|
|
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
| 761 |
|
|
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
| 762 |
|
|
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
| 763 |
|
|
\comment
|
| 764 |
|
|
}
|
| 765 |
|
|
%
|
| 766 |
|
|
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
|
| 767 |
|
|
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
|
| 768 |
|
|
% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
| 769 |
|
|
% above. But it's pretty close.
|
| 770 |
|
|
\def\Egroup{%
|
| 771 |
|
|
% To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
|
| 772 |
|
|
% and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
|
| 773 |
|
|
\endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
|
| 774 |
|
|
\global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
|
| 775 |
|
|
\egroup % End the \vtop.
|
| 776 |
|
|
% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
|
| 777 |
|
|
\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
|
| 778 |
|
|
% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
|
| 779 |
|
|
\dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
|
| 780 |
|
|
% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
|
| 781 |
|
|
% group, force a page break.
|
| 782 |
|
|
\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
|
| 783 |
|
|
\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
|
| 784 |
|
|
\page
|
| 785 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 786 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 787 |
|
|
\box\groupbox
|
| 788 |
|
|
\prevdepth = \dimen1
|
| 789 |
|
|
\checkinserts
|
| 790 |
|
|
}
|
| 791 |
|
|
%
|
| 792 |
|
|
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
| 793 |
|
|
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
| 794 |
|
|
%
|
| 795 |
|
|
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
| 796 |
|
|
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
| 797 |
|
|
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
| 798 |
|
|
|
| 799 |
|
|
% @need space-in-mils
|
| 800 |
|
|
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
| 801 |
|
|
|
| 802 |
|
|
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
| 803 |
|
|
|
| 804 |
|
|
% Old definition--didn't work.
|
| 805 |
|
|
%\parseargdef\need{\par %
|
| 806 |
|
|
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
| 807 |
|
|
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
| 808 |
|
|
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
| 809 |
|
|
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
|
| 810 |
|
|
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
| 811 |
|
|
%}}
|
| 812 |
|
|
|
| 813 |
|
|
\parseargdef\need{%
|
| 814 |
|
|
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
| 815 |
|
|
% paragraph.
|
| 816 |
|
|
\par
|
| 817 |
|
|
%
|
| 818 |
|
|
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
| 819 |
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\mil
|
| 820 |
|
|
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
| 821 |
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
| 822 |
|
|
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
| 823 |
|
|
%
|
| 824 |
|
|
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
| 825 |
|
|
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
| 826 |
|
|
% And a page break here is fine.
|
| 827 |
|
|
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
| 828 |
|
|
%
|
| 829 |
|
|
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
| 830 |
|
|
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
| 831 |
|
|
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
| 832 |
|
|
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
| 833 |
|
|
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
| 834 |
|
|
%
|
| 835 |
|
|
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
| 836 |
|
|
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
| 837 |
|
|
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
| 838 |
|
|
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
| 839 |
|
|
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
| 840 |
|
|
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
| 841 |
|
|
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
| 842 |
|
|
\penalty9999
|
| 843 |
|
|
%
|
| 844 |
|
|
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
| 845 |
|
|
\kern -#1\mil
|
| 846 |
|
|
%
|
| 847 |
|
|
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
| 848 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 849 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 850 |
|
|
}
|
| 851 |
|
|
|
| 852 |
|
|
% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
|
| 853 |
|
|
|
| 854 |
|
|
\let\br = \par
|
| 855 |
|
|
|
| 856 |
|
|
% @page forces the start of a new page.
|
| 857 |
|
|
%
|
| 858 |
|
|
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
| 859 |
|
|
|
| 860 |
|
|
% @exdent text....
|
| 861 |
|
|
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
| 862 |
|
|
|
| 863 |
|
|
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
| 864 |
|
|
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
| 865 |
|
|
\newskip\exdentamount
|
| 866 |
|
|
|
| 867 |
|
|
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
| 868 |
|
|
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
|
| 869 |
|
|
|
| 870 |
|
|
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
| 871 |
|
|
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
| 872 |
|
|
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
| 873 |
|
|
|
| 874 |
|
|
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
|
| 875 |
|
|
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
|
| 876 |
|
|
% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
|
| 877 |
|
|
%
|
| 878 |
|
|
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
| 879 |
|
|
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
| 880 |
|
|
%
|
| 881 |
|
|
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
|
| 882 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 883 |
|
|
\kern-\strutdepth
|
| 884 |
|
|
\vtop to \strutdepth{%
|
| 885 |
|
|
\baselineskip=\strutdepth
|
| 886 |
|
|
\vss
|
| 887 |
|
|
% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
|
| 888 |
|
|
% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
|
| 889 |
|
|
\ifx#1l%
|
| 890 |
|
|
\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
|
| 891 |
|
|
\else
|
| 892 |
|
|
\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 893 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 894 |
|
|
\null
|
| 895 |
|
|
}%
|
| 896 |
|
|
}}
|
| 897 |
|
|
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
|
| 898 |
|
|
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
|
| 899 |
|
|
%
|
| 900 |
|
|
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
|
| 901 |
|
|
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
|
| 902 |
|
|
% else use TEXT for both).
|
| 903 |
|
|
%
|
| 904 |
|
|
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
|
| 905 |
|
|
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
|
| 906 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 907 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| 908 |
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
|
| 909 |
|
|
\def\righttext{#2}%
|
| 910 |
|
|
\else
|
| 911 |
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
|
| 912 |
|
|
\def\righttext{#1}%
|
| 913 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 914 |
|
|
%
|
| 915 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno
|
| 916 |
|
|
\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
|
| 917 |
|
|
\else
|
| 918 |
|
|
\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
|
| 919 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 920 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 921 |
|
|
}
|
| 922 |
|
|
|
| 923 |
|
|
% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
|
| 924 |
|
|
%
|
| 925 |
|
|
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
|
| 926 |
|
|
\def\includezzz#1{%
|
| 927 |
|
|
\pushthisfilestack
|
| 928 |
|
|
\def\thisfile{#1}%
|
| 929 |
|
|
{%
|
| 930 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
|
| 931 |
|
|
\turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
|
| 932 |
|
|
\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
| 933 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
|
| 934 |
|
|
%
|
| 935 |
|
|
% This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
|
| 936 |
|
|
% definitions, etc.
|
| 937 |
|
|
\expandafter
|
| 938 |
|
|
}\temp
|
| 939 |
|
|
\popthisfilestack
|
| 940 |
|
|
}
|
| 941 |
|
|
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
|
| 942 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
| 943 |
|
|
\catcode`~=\other
|
| 944 |
|
|
\catcode`^=\other
|
| 945 |
|
|
\catcode`_=\other
|
| 946 |
|
|
\catcode`|=\other
|
| 947 |
|
|
\catcode`<=\other
|
| 948 |
|
|
\catcode`>=\other
|
| 949 |
|
|
\catcode`+=\other
|
| 950 |
|
|
\catcode`-=\other
|
| 951 |
|
|
\catcode`\`=\other
|
| 952 |
|
|
\catcode`\'=\other
|
| 953 |
|
|
}
|
| 954 |
|
|
|
| 955 |
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
|
| 956 |
|
|
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
|
| 957 |
|
|
}
|
| 958 |
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
|
| 959 |
|
|
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
|
| 960 |
|
|
}
|
| 961 |
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
|
| 962 |
|
|
\gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
|
| 963 |
|
|
}
|
| 964 |
|
|
|
| 965 |
|
|
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
|
| 966 |
|
|
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
|
| 967 |
|
|
the stack of filenames is empty.}}
|
| 968 |
|
|
|
| 969 |
|
|
\def\thisfile{}
|
| 970 |
|
|
|
| 971 |
|
|
% @center line
|
| 972 |
|
|
% outputs that line, centered.
|
| 973 |
|
|
%
|
| 974 |
|
|
\parseargdef\center{%
|
| 975 |
|
|
\ifhmode
|
| 976 |
|
|
\let\next\centerH
|
| 977 |
|
|
\else
|
| 978 |
|
|
\let\next\centerV
|
| 979 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 980 |
|
|
\next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
|
| 981 |
|
|
}
|
| 982 |
|
|
\def\centerH#1{%
|
| 983 |
|
|
{%
|
| 984 |
|
|
\hfil\break
|
| 985 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
| 986 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
| 987 |
|
|
\line{#1}%
|
| 988 |
|
|
\break
|
| 989 |
|
|
}%
|
| 990 |
|
|
}
|
| 991 |
|
|
\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
|
| 992 |
|
|
|
| 993 |
|
|
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
| 994 |
|
|
|
| 995 |
|
|
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
| 996 |
|
|
|
| 997 |
|
|
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
| 998 |
|
|
% @c is the same as @comment
|
| 999 |
|
|
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
| 1000 |
|
|
|
| 1001 |
|
|
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
|
| 1002 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
| 1003 |
|
|
\commentxxx}
|
| 1004 |
|
|
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
| 1005 |
|
|
|
| 1006 |
|
|
\let\c=\comment
|
| 1007 |
|
|
|
| 1008 |
|
|
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
| 1009 |
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
| 1010 |
|
|
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
|
| 1011 |
|
|
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
| 1012 |
|
|
%
|
| 1013 |
|
|
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
| 1014 |
|
|
\def\noneword{none}
|
| 1015 |
|
|
%
|
| 1016 |
|
|
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
|
| 1017 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 1018 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
| 1019 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1020 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
| 1021 |
|
|
\defaultparindent = 0pt
|
| 1022 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1023 |
|
|
\defaultparindent = #1em
|
| 1024 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1025 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1026 |
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
| 1027 |
|
|
}
|
| 1028 |
|
|
|
| 1029 |
|
|
% @exampleindent NCHARS
|
| 1030 |
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
| 1031 |
|
|
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
| 1032 |
|
|
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
| 1033 |
|
|
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
|
| 1034 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 1035 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
| 1036 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1037 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
| 1038 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
| 1039 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1040 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = #1em
|
| 1041 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1042 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1043 |
|
|
}
|
| 1044 |
|
|
|
| 1045 |
|
|
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
|
| 1046 |
|
|
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
|
| 1047 |
|
|
% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
|
| 1048 |
|
|
% paragraphs.
|
| 1049 |
|
|
%
|
| 1050 |
|
|
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
|
| 1051 |
|
|
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
|
| 1052 |
|
|
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
|
| 1053 |
|
|
% By default, we suppress indentation.
|
| 1054 |
|
|
%
|
| 1055 |
|
|
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
| 1056 |
|
|
\def\insertword{insert}
|
| 1057 |
|
|
%
|
| 1058 |
|
|
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
|
| 1059 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 1060 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
| 1061 |
|
|
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
|
| 1062 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\insertword
|
| 1063 |
|
|
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
|
| 1064 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1065 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| 1066 |
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
|
| 1067 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
| 1068 |
|
|
}
|
| 1069 |
|
|
|
| 1070 |
|
|
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
|
| 1071 |
|
|
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
|
| 1072 |
|
|
%
|
| 1073 |
|
|
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
|
| 1074 |
|
|
% paragraph.
|
| 1075 |
|
|
%
|
| 1076 |
|
|
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
|
| 1077 |
|
|
\gdef\indent{%
|
| 1078 |
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
| 1079 |
|
|
\indent
|
| 1080 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1081 |
|
|
\gdef\noindent{%
|
| 1082 |
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
| 1083 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 1084 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1085 |
|
|
\global\everypar = {%
|
| 1086 |
|
|
\kern -\parindent
|
| 1087 |
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
| 1088 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1089 |
|
|
}
|
| 1090 |
|
|
|
| 1091 |
|
|
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
|
| 1092 |
|
|
\global \let \indent = \ptexindent
|
| 1093 |
|
|
\global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
|
| 1094 |
|
|
\global \everypar = {}%
|
| 1095 |
|
|
}
|
| 1096 |
|
|
|
| 1097 |
|
|
|
| 1098 |
|
|
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
| 1099 |
|
|
%
|
| 1100 |
|
|
\def\asis#1{#1}
|
| 1101 |
|
|
|
| 1102 |
|
|
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
|
| 1103 |
|
|
%
|
| 1104 |
|
|
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
|
| 1105 |
|
|
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
|
| 1106 |
|
|
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
|
| 1107 |
|
|
% which is what @var uses.
|
| 1108 |
|
|
{
|
| 1109 |
|
|
\catcode`\_ = \active
|
| 1110 |
|
|
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
|
| 1111 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
| 1112 |
|
|
\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
|
| 1113 |
|
|
}
|
| 1114 |
|
|
}
|
| 1115 |
|
|
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
|
| 1116 |
|
|
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
|
| 1117 |
|
|
% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
|
| 1118 |
|
|
% otherwise define @\.
|
| 1119 |
|
|
%
|
| 1120 |
|
|
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
|
| 1121 |
|
|
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
|
| 1122 |
|
|
%
|
| 1123 |
|
|
\def\math{%
|
| 1124 |
|
|
\tex
|
| 1125 |
|
|
\mathunderscore
|
| 1126 |
|
|
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
|
| 1127 |
|
|
\mathactive
|
| 1128 |
|
|
% make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
|
| 1129 |
|
|
\let\"=\ddot
|
| 1130 |
|
|
\let\'=\acute
|
| 1131 |
|
|
\let\==\bar
|
| 1132 |
|
|
\let\^=\hat
|
| 1133 |
|
|
\let\`=\grave
|
| 1134 |
|
|
\let\u=\breve
|
| 1135 |
|
|
\let\v=\check
|
| 1136 |
|
|
\let\~=\tilde
|
| 1137 |
|
|
\let\dotaccent=\dot
|
| 1138 |
|
|
$\finishmath
|
| 1139 |
|
|
}
|
| 1140 |
|
|
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
|
| 1141 |
|
|
|
| 1142 |
|
|
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
|
| 1143 |
|
|
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
|
| 1144 |
|
|
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
|
| 1145 |
|
|
%
|
| 1146 |
|
|
{
|
| 1147 |
|
|
\catcode`^ = \active
|
| 1148 |
|
|
\catcode`< = \active
|
| 1149 |
|
|
\catcode`> = \active
|
| 1150 |
|
|
\catcode`+ = \active
|
| 1151 |
|
|
\catcode`' = \active
|
| 1152 |
|
|
\gdef\mathactive{%
|
| 1153 |
|
|
\let^ = \ptexhat
|
| 1154 |
|
|
\let< = \ptexless
|
| 1155 |
|
|
\let> = \ptexgtr
|
| 1156 |
|
|
\let+ = \ptexplus
|
| 1157 |
|
|
\let' = \ptexquoteright
|
| 1158 |
|
|
}
|
| 1159 |
|
|
}
|
| 1160 |
|
|
|
| 1161 |
|
|
% Some math mode symbols.
|
| 1162 |
|
|
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
|
| 1163 |
|
|
\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
|
| 1164 |
|
|
\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
|
| 1165 |
|
|
\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
|
| 1166 |
|
|
|
| 1167 |
|
|
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
|
| 1168 |
|
|
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
|
| 1169 |
|
|
% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
|
| 1170 |
|
|
% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
|
| 1171 |
|
|
% whichever is larger.
|
| 1172 |
|
|
%
|
| 1173 |
|
|
\def\dots{%
|
| 1174 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
| 1175 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
|
| 1176 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
|
| 1177 |
|
|
\dimen0 = \wd0
|
| 1178 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1179 |
|
|
\dimen0 = 1.5em
|
| 1180 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1181 |
|
|
\hbox to \dimen0{%
|
| 1182 |
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus.25fil
|
| 1183 |
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
| 1184 |
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
| 1185 |
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
|
| 1186 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1187 |
|
|
}
|
| 1188 |
|
|
|
| 1189 |
|
|
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
| 1190 |
|
|
%
|
| 1191 |
|
|
\def\enddots{%
|
| 1192 |
|
|
\dots
|
| 1193 |
|
|
\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
|
| 1194 |
|
|
}
|
| 1195 |
|
|
|
| 1196 |
|
|
% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
|
| 1197 |
|
|
% Texinfo's parsing.
|
| 1198 |
|
|
%
|
| 1199 |
|
|
\let\comma = ,
|
| 1200 |
|
|
|
| 1201 |
|
|
% @refill is a no-op.
|
| 1202 |
|
|
\let\refill=\relax
|
| 1203 |
|
|
|
| 1204 |
|
|
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
| 1205 |
|
|
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
| 1206 |
|
|
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
|
| 1207 |
|
|
%
|
| 1208 |
|
|
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
| 1209 |
|
|
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
| 1210 |
|
|
|
| 1211 |
|
|
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
| 1212 |
|
|
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
| 1213 |
|
|
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
| 1214 |
|
|
\def\setfilename{%
|
| 1215 |
|
|
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
| 1216 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 1217 |
|
|
\tryauxfile
|
| 1218 |
|
|
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
| 1219 |
|
|
\immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
| 1220 |
|
|
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
|
| 1221 |
|
|
\openindices
|
| 1222 |
|
|
\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
| 1223 |
|
|
%
|
| 1224 |
|
|
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
| 1225 |
|
|
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
| 1226 |
|
|
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
| 1227 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
|
| 1228 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 1229 |
|
|
%
|
| 1230 |
|
|
\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
| 1231 |
|
|
}
|
| 1232 |
|
|
|
| 1233 |
|
|
% Called from \setfilename.
|
| 1234 |
|
|
%
|
| 1235 |
|
|
\def\openindices{%
|
| 1236 |
|
|
\newindex{cp}%
|
| 1237 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{fn}%
|
| 1238 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{vr}%
|
| 1239 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{tp}%
|
| 1240 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{ky}%
|
| 1241 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{pg}%
|
| 1242 |
|
|
}
|
| 1243 |
|
|
|
| 1244 |
|
|
% @bye.
|
| 1245 |
|
|
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
| 1246 |
|
|
|
| 1247 |
|
|
|
| 1248 |
|
|
\message{pdf,}
|
| 1249 |
|
|
% adobe `portable' document format
|
| 1250 |
|
|
\newcount\tempnum
|
| 1251 |
|
|
\newcount\lnkcount
|
| 1252 |
|
|
\newtoks\filename
|
| 1253 |
|
|
\newcount\filenamelength
|
| 1254 |
|
|
\newcount\pgn
|
| 1255 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksA
|
| 1256 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksB
|
| 1257 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksC
|
| 1258 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksD
|
| 1259 |
|
|
\newbox\boxA
|
| 1260 |
|
|
\newcount\countA
|
| 1261 |
|
|
\newif\ifpdf
|
| 1262 |
|
|
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
| 1263 |
|
|
|
| 1264 |
|
|
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
|
| 1265 |
|
|
% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
|
| 1266 |
|
|
% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
|
| 1267 |
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
|
| 1268 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1269 |
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
|
| 1270 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1271 |
|
|
\ifcase\pdfoutput
|
| 1272 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1273 |
|
|
\pdftrue
|
| 1274 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1275 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1276 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1277 |
|
|
|
| 1278 |
|
|
% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
|
| 1279 |
|
|
% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
|
| 1280 |
|
|
% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
|
| 1281 |
|
|
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
|
| 1282 |
|
|
% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
|
| 1283 |
|
|
% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
|
| 1284 |
|
|
% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
|
| 1285 |
|
|
% that's what we do).
|
| 1286 |
|
|
|
| 1287 |
|
|
% double active backslashes.
|
| 1288 |
|
|
%
|
| 1289 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
|
| 1290 |
|
|
@gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
|
| 1291 |
|
|
@catcode`@\=@active
|
| 1292 |
|
|
@let\=@doublebackslash}
|
| 1293 |
|
|
}
|
| 1294 |
|
|
|
| 1295 |
|
|
% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
|
| 1296 |
|
|
% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
|
| 1297 |
|
|
% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
|
| 1298 |
|
|
% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission
|
| 1299 |
|
|
% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
|
| 1300 |
|
|
%
|
| 1301 |
|
|
% #1 is the tokens to replace.
|
| 1302 |
|
|
% #2 is the replacement.
|
| 1303 |
|
|
% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
|
| 1304 |
|
|
%
|
| 1305 |
|
|
\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
|
| 1306 |
|
|
\def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
|
| 1307 |
|
|
##1%
|
| 1308 |
|
|
\ifx\\##2\\%
|
| 1309 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1310 |
|
|
#2%
|
| 1311 |
|
|
\HyReturnAfterFi{%
|
| 1312 |
|
|
\HyPsdReplace##2\END
|
| 1313 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1314 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1315 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1316 |
|
|
\xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
|
| 1317 |
|
|
}
|
| 1318 |
|
|
\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
|
| 1319 |
|
|
|
| 1320 |
|
|
% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
|
| 1321 |
|
|
\def\backslashparens#1{%
|
| 1322 |
|
|
\xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
|
| 1323 |
|
|
% \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
|
| 1324 |
|
|
\HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
|
| 1325 |
|
|
\HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
|
| 1326 |
|
|
}
|
| 1327 |
|
|
|
| 1328 |
|
|
\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
|
| 1329 |
|
|
with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
|
| 1330 |
|
|
be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
|
| 1331 |
|
|
output) for that.)}
|
| 1332 |
|
|
|
| 1333 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 1334 |
|
|
%
|
| 1335 |
|
|
% Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
|
| 1336 |
|
|
% except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
|
| 1337 |
|
|
% very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
|
| 1338 |
|
|
% of actual black.
|
| 1339 |
|
|
\def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
|
| 1340 |
|
|
\def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
|
| 1341 |
|
|
%
|
| 1342 |
|
|
% k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
|
| 1343 |
|
|
% K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
|
| 1344 |
|
|
\def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
|
| 1345 |
|
|
%
|
| 1346 |
|
|
% Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
|
| 1347 |
|
|
% so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
|
| 1348 |
|
|
\def\setcolor#1{%
|
| 1349 |
|
|
\xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
|
| 1350 |
|
|
\domark
|
| 1351 |
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{#1}%
|
| 1352 |
|
|
}
|
| 1353 |
|
|
%
|
| 1354 |
|
|
\def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
|
| 1355 |
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
|
| 1356 |
|
|
\edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
|
| 1357 |
|
|
\def\lastcolordefs{}
|
| 1358 |
|
|
%
|
| 1359 |
|
|
\def\makefootline{%
|
| 1360 |
|
|
\baselineskip24pt
|
| 1361 |
|
|
\line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
|
| 1362 |
|
|
}
|
| 1363 |
|
|
%
|
| 1364 |
|
|
\def\makeheadline{%
|
| 1365 |
|
|
\vbox to 0pt{%
|
| 1366 |
|
|
\vskip-22.5pt
|
| 1367 |
|
|
\line{%
|
| 1368 |
|
|
\vbox to8.5pt{}%
|
| 1369 |
|
|
% Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
|
| 1370 |
|
|
\getcolormarks
|
| 1371 |
|
|
% Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
|
| 1372 |
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
|
| 1373 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1374 |
|
|
\vss
|
| 1375 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1376 |
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
| 1377 |
|
|
}
|
| 1378 |
|
|
%
|
| 1379 |
|
|
%
|
| 1380 |
|
|
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
|
| 1381 |
|
|
%
|
| 1382 |
|
|
% #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
|
| 1383 |
|
|
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
| 1384 |
|
|
\def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 1385 |
|
|
\def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
| 1386 |
|
|
%
|
| 1387 |
|
|
% pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
|
| 1388 |
|
|
% others). Let's try in that order.
|
| 1389 |
|
|
\let\pdfimgext=\empty
|
| 1390 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 1391 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
|
| 1392 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
|
| 1393 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
|
| 1394 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
|
| 1395 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
|
| 1396 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
|
| 1397 |
|
|
\errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
|
| 1398 |
|
|
\errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
|
| 1399 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
|
| 1400 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1401 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
|
| 1402 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1403 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
|
| 1404 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1405 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
|
| 1406 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1407 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
|
| 1408 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1409 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
|
| 1410 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1411 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 1412 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 1413 |
|
|
%
|
| 1414 |
|
|
% without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
|
| 1415 |
|
|
% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
|
| 1416 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
| 1417 |
|
|
\immediate\pdfimage
|
| 1418 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1419 |
|
|
\immediate\pdfximage
|
| 1420 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1421 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
|
| 1422 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
|
| 1423 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
|
| 1424 |
|
|
#1.\pdfimgext
|
| 1425 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1426 |
|
|
{#1.\pdfimgext}%
|
| 1427 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1428 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
| 1429 |
|
|
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
| 1430 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 1431 |
|
|
%
|
| 1432 |
|
|
\def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
|
| 1433 |
|
|
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
| 1434 |
|
|
% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
| 1435 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
| 1436 |
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
| 1437 |
|
|
\activebackslashdouble
|
| 1438 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
| 1439 |
|
|
\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
| 1440 |
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfdestname
|
| 1441 |
|
|
\safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
|
| 1442 |
|
|
}}
|
| 1443 |
|
|
%
|
| 1444 |
|
|
% used to mark target names; must be expandable.
|
| 1445 |
|
|
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
|
| 1446 |
|
|
%
|
| 1447 |
|
|
% by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
|
| 1448 |
|
|
% nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
|
| 1449 |
|
|
\def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
|
| 1450 |
|
|
\def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
|
| 1451 |
|
|
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
|
| 1452 |
|
|
%
|
| 1453 |
|
|
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
| 1454 |
|
|
% come from Petr Olsak
|
| 1455 |
|
|
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
| 1456 |
|
|
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
| 1457 |
|
|
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
| 1458 |
|
|
\advance\tempnum by 1
|
| 1459 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
| 1460 |
|
|
%
|
| 1461 |
|
|
% #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
|
| 1462 |
|
|
% outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
|
| 1463 |
|
|
% of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
|
| 1464 |
|
|
% which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
|
| 1465 |
|
|
% #4 is the page number
|
| 1466 |
|
|
%
|
| 1467 |
|
|
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
| 1468 |
|
|
% Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
|
| 1469 |
|
|
% page number. We could generate a destination for the section
|
| 1470 |
|
|
% text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
|
| 1471 |
|
|
% seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
|
| 1472 |
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
| 1473 |
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
|
| 1474 |
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
|
| 1475 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1476 |
|
|
% Doubled backslashes in the name.
|
| 1477 |
|
|
{\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
| 1478 |
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
|
| 1479 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1480 |
|
|
%
|
| 1481 |
|
|
% Also double the backslashes in the display string.
|
| 1482 |
|
|
{\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
| 1483 |
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
| 1484 |
|
|
%
|
| 1485 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
| 1486 |
|
|
}
|
| 1487 |
|
|
%
|
| 1488 |
|
|
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
| 1489 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 1490 |
|
|
% Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
|
| 1491 |
|
|
\edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
|
| 1492 |
|
|
\edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
|
| 1493 |
|
|
%
|
| 1494 |
|
|
% Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
|
| 1495 |
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1496 |
|
|
\def\thischapnum{##2}%
|
| 1497 |
|
|
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
| 1498 |
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
| 1499 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1500 |
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1501 |
|
|
\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
|
| 1502 |
|
|
\def\thissecnum{##2}%
|
| 1503 |
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
| 1504 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1505 |
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1506 |
|
|
\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
|
| 1507 |
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
|
| 1508 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1509 |
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1510 |
|
|
\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
|
| 1511 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1512 |
|
|
\def\thischapnum{0}%
|
| 1513 |
|
|
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
| 1514 |
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
| 1515 |
|
|
%
|
| 1516 |
|
|
% use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
|
| 1517 |
|
|
% al. a second time, below.
|
| 1518 |
|
|
\def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
|
| 1519 |
|
|
\def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
| 1520 |
|
|
\def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
| 1521 |
|
|
\def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
| 1522 |
|
|
\def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
|
| 1523 |
|
|
\def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
| 1524 |
|
|
\def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
| 1525 |
|
|
\def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
| 1526 |
|
|
\readdatafile{toc}%
|
| 1527 |
|
|
%
|
| 1528 |
|
|
% Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
|
| 1529 |
|
|
% The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
|
| 1530 |
|
|
% subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
|
| 1531 |
|
|
%
|
| 1532 |
|
|
% We use the node names as the destinations.
|
| 1533 |
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1534 |
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
| 1535 |
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1536 |
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
| 1537 |
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1538 |
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
| 1539 |
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
|
| 1540 |
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
|
| 1541 |
|
|
%
|
| 1542 |
|
|
% PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
|
| 1543 |
|
|
% document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
|
| 1544 |
|
|
% since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
|
| 1545 |
|
|
% Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
|
| 1546 |
|
|
% Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
|
| 1547 |
|
|
%
|
| 1548 |
|
|
% xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
|
| 1549 |
|
|
% their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
|
| 1550 |
|
|
% now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
|
| 1551 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
| 1552 |
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
| 1553 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
| 1554 |
|
|
\input \tocreadfilename
|
| 1555 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 1556 |
|
|
}
|
| 1557 |
|
|
%
|
| 1558 |
|
|
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
| 1559 |
|
|
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
| 1560 |
|
|
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
| 1561 |
|
|
\ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
| 1562 |
|
|
\advance\filenamelength by 1
|
| 1563 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1564 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1565 |
|
|
\nextsp}
|
| 1566 |
|
|
\def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
|
| 1567 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
| 1568 |
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
| 1569 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1570 |
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
| 1571 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1572 |
|
|
% make a live url in pdf output.
|
| 1573 |
|
|
\def\pdfurl#1{%
|
| 1574 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 1575 |
|
|
% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
| 1576 |
|
|
% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
| 1577 |
|
|
% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
| 1578 |
|
|
% people have actually reported a problem with.
|
| 1579 |
|
|
%
|
| 1580 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
| 1581 |
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
| 1582 |
|
|
\let\/=\empty
|
| 1583 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
| 1584 |
|
|
% do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
|
| 1585 |
|
|
% special-casing \var here?
|
| 1586 |
|
|
\def\var##1{##1}%
|
| 1587 |
|
|
%
|
| 1588 |
|
|
\leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
|
| 1589 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
| 1590 |
|
|
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
| 1591 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 1592 |
|
|
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
| 1593 |
|
|
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
| 1594 |
|
|
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
| 1595 |
|
|
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
| 1596 |
|
|
\def\maketoks{%
|
| 1597 |
|
|
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
| 1598 |
|
|
\ifx\first0\adn0
|
| 1599 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
| 1600 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
| 1601 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
| 1602 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1603 |
|
|
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
| 1604 |
|
|
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
| 1605 |
|
|
\let\next=\maketoks
|
| 1606 |
|
|
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
| 1607 |
|
|
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
| 1608 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1609 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
| 1610 |
|
|
\next}
|
| 1611 |
|
|
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
| 1612 |
|
|
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
| 1613 |
|
|
\def\pdflink#1{%
|
| 1614 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
|
| 1615 |
|
|
\setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
|
| 1616 |
|
|
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
| 1617 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1618 |
|
|
% non-pdf mode
|
| 1619 |
|
|
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
| 1620 |
|
|
\let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
| 1621 |
|
|
\let\endlink = \relax
|
| 1622 |
|
|
\let\setcolor = \gobble
|
| 1623 |
|
|
\let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
|
| 1624 |
|
|
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
| 1625 |
|
|
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
| 1626 |
|
|
|
| 1627 |
|
|
|
| 1628 |
|
|
\message{fonts,}
|
| 1629 |
|
|
|
| 1630 |
|
|
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
|
| 1631 |
|
|
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
|
| 1632 |
|
|
% italics, not bold italics.
|
| 1633 |
|
|
%
|
| 1634 |
|
|
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
|
| 1635 |
|
|
\def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
|
| 1636 |
|
|
\csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
|
| 1637 |
|
|
}
|
| 1638 |
|
|
|
| 1639 |
|
|
% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
|
| 1640 |
|
|
%
|
| 1641 |
|
|
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
|
| 1642 |
|
|
|
| 1643 |
|
|
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
|
| 1644 |
|
|
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
|
| 1645 |
|
|
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
|
| 1646 |
|
|
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
|
| 1647 |
|
|
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
|
| 1648 |
|
|
|
| 1649 |
|
|
% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
|
| 1650 |
|
|
% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
|
| 1651 |
|
|
\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
|
| 1652 |
|
|
|
| 1653 |
|
|
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
| 1654 |
|
|
% So we set up a \sf.
|
| 1655 |
|
|
\newfam\sffam
|
| 1656 |
|
|
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
|
| 1657 |
|
|
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
| 1658 |
|
|
|
| 1659 |
|
|
% We don't need math for this font style.
|
| 1660 |
|
|
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
|
| 1661 |
|
|
|
| 1662 |
|
|
|
| 1663 |
|
|
% Default leading.
|
| 1664 |
|
|
\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
|
| 1665 |
|
|
|
| 1666 |
|
|
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
| 1667 |
|
|
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
| 1668 |
|
|
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
| 1669 |
|
|
%
|
| 1670 |
|
|
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
| 1671 |
|
|
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
| 1672 |
|
|
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
| 1673 |
|
|
%
|
| 1674 |
|
|
% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
|
| 1675 |
|
|
\def\baselinefactor{1}
|
| 1676 |
|
|
%
|
| 1677 |
|
|
\def\setleading#1{%
|
| 1678 |
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\relax
|
| 1679 |
|
|
\normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
|
| 1680 |
|
|
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
| 1681 |
|
|
\normalbaselines
|
| 1682 |
|
|
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
| 1683 |
|
|
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
| 1684 |
|
|
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
| 1685 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1686 |
|
|
}
|
| 1687 |
|
|
|
| 1688 |
|
|
% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
|
| 1689 |
|
|
%
|
| 1690 |
|
|
% do nothing with this by default.
|
| 1691 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
|
| 1692 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
|
| 1693 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
|
| 1694 |
|
|
|
| 1695 |
|
|
% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
|
| 1696 |
|
|
% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
|
| 1697 |
|
|
% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
|
| 1698 |
|
|
\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
|
| 1699 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 1700 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
| 1701 |
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
| 1702 |
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| 1703 |
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| 1704 |
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
|
| 1705 |
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
|
| 1706 |
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
| 1707 |
|
|
%%EndComments
|
| 1708 |
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
| 1709 |
|
|
12 dict begin
|
| 1710 |
|
|
begincmap
|
| 1711 |
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
| 1712 |
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
| 1713 |
|
|
/Ordering (OT1)
|
| 1714 |
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
| 1715 |
|
|
>> def
|
| 1716 |
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
|
| 1717 |
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
| 1718 |
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
| 1719 |
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
| 1720 |
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
| 1721 |
|
|
8 beginbfrange
|
| 1722 |
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
| 1723 |
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
| 1724 |
|
|
<23> <26> <0023>
|
| 1725 |
|
|
<28> <3B> <0028>
|
| 1726 |
|
|
<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
| 1727 |
|
|
<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
| 1728 |
|
|
<61> <7A> <0061>
|
| 1729 |
|
|
<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
| 1730 |
|
|
endbfrange
|
| 1731 |
|
|
40 beginbfchar
|
| 1732 |
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
| 1733 |
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
| 1734 |
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
| 1735 |
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
| 1736 |
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
| 1737 |
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
| 1738 |
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
| 1739 |
|
|
<0B> <00660066>
|
| 1740 |
|
|
<0C> <00660069>
|
| 1741 |
|
|
<0D> <0066006C>
|
| 1742 |
|
|
<0E> <006600660069>
|
| 1743 |
|
|
<0F> <00660066006C>
|
| 1744 |
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
| 1745 |
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
| 1746 |
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
| 1747 |
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
| 1748 |
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
| 1749 |
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
| 1750 |
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
| 1751 |
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
| 1752 |
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
| 1753 |
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
| 1754 |
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
| 1755 |
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
| 1756 |
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
| 1757 |
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
| 1758 |
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
| 1759 |
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
| 1760 |
|
|
<21> <0021>
|
| 1761 |
|
|
<22> <201D>
|
| 1762 |
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
| 1763 |
|
|
<3C> <00A1>
|
| 1764 |
|
|
<3D> <003D>
|
| 1765 |
|
|
<3E> <00BF>
|
| 1766 |
|
|
<5C> <201C>
|
| 1767 |
|
|
<5F> <02D9>
|
| 1768 |
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
| 1769 |
|
|
<7D> <02DD>
|
| 1770 |
|
|
<7E> <007E>
|
| 1771 |
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
| 1772 |
|
|
endbfchar
|
| 1773 |
|
|
endcmap
|
| 1774 |
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
| 1775 |
|
|
end
|
| 1776 |
|
|
end
|
| 1777 |
|
|
%%EndResource
|
| 1778 |
|
|
%%EOF
|
| 1779 |
|
|
}\endgroup
|
| 1780 |
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
|
| 1781 |
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
| 1782 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1783 |
|
|
%
|
| 1784 |
|
|
% \cmapOT1IT
|
| 1785 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 1786 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
| 1787 |
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
| 1788 |
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| 1789 |
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| 1790 |
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
|
| 1791 |
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
|
| 1792 |
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
| 1793 |
|
|
%%EndComments
|
| 1794 |
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
| 1795 |
|
|
12 dict begin
|
| 1796 |
|
|
begincmap
|
| 1797 |
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
| 1798 |
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
| 1799 |
|
|
/Ordering (OT1IT)
|
| 1800 |
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
| 1801 |
|
|
>> def
|
| 1802 |
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
|
| 1803 |
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
| 1804 |
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
| 1805 |
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
| 1806 |
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
| 1807 |
|
|
8 beginbfrange
|
| 1808 |
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
| 1809 |
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
| 1810 |
|
|
<25> <26> <0025>
|
| 1811 |
|
|
<28> <3B> <0028>
|
| 1812 |
|
|
<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
| 1813 |
|
|
<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
| 1814 |
|
|
<61> <7A> <0061>
|
| 1815 |
|
|
<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
| 1816 |
|
|
endbfrange
|
| 1817 |
|
|
42 beginbfchar
|
| 1818 |
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
| 1819 |
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
| 1820 |
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
| 1821 |
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
| 1822 |
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
| 1823 |
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
| 1824 |
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
| 1825 |
|
|
<0B> <00660066>
|
| 1826 |
|
|
<0C> <00660069>
|
| 1827 |
|
|
<0D> <0066006C>
|
| 1828 |
|
|
<0E> <006600660069>
|
| 1829 |
|
|
<0F> <00660066006C>
|
| 1830 |
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
| 1831 |
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
| 1832 |
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
| 1833 |
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
| 1834 |
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
| 1835 |
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
| 1836 |
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
| 1837 |
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
| 1838 |
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
| 1839 |
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
| 1840 |
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
| 1841 |
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
| 1842 |
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
| 1843 |
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
| 1844 |
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
| 1845 |
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
| 1846 |
|
|
<21> <0021>
|
| 1847 |
|
|
<22> <201D>
|
| 1848 |
|
|
<23> <0023>
|
| 1849 |
|
|
<24> <00A3>
|
| 1850 |
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
| 1851 |
|
|
<3C> <00A1>
|
| 1852 |
|
|
<3D> <003D>
|
| 1853 |
|
|
<3E> <00BF>
|
| 1854 |
|
|
<5C> <201C>
|
| 1855 |
|
|
<5F> <02D9>
|
| 1856 |
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
| 1857 |
|
|
<7D> <02DD>
|
| 1858 |
|
|
<7E> <007E>
|
| 1859 |
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
| 1860 |
|
|
endbfchar
|
| 1861 |
|
|
endcmap
|
| 1862 |
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
| 1863 |
|
|
end
|
| 1864 |
|
|
end
|
| 1865 |
|
|
%%EndResource
|
| 1866 |
|
|
%%EOF
|
| 1867 |
|
|
}\endgroup
|
| 1868 |
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
|
| 1869 |
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
| 1870 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1871 |
|
|
%
|
| 1872 |
|
|
% \cmapOT1TT
|
| 1873 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 1874 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
| 1875 |
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
| 1876 |
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| 1877 |
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| 1878 |
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
|
| 1879 |
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
|
| 1880 |
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
| 1881 |
|
|
%%EndComments
|
| 1882 |
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
| 1883 |
|
|
12 dict begin
|
| 1884 |
|
|
begincmap
|
| 1885 |
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
| 1886 |
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
| 1887 |
|
|
/Ordering (OT1TT)
|
| 1888 |
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
| 1889 |
|
|
>> def
|
| 1890 |
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
|
| 1891 |
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
| 1892 |
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
| 1893 |
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
| 1894 |
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
| 1895 |
|
|
5 beginbfrange
|
| 1896 |
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
| 1897 |
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
| 1898 |
|
|
<21> <26> <0021>
|
| 1899 |
|
|
<28> <5F> <0028>
|
| 1900 |
|
|
<61> <7E> <0061>
|
| 1901 |
|
|
endbfrange
|
| 1902 |
|
|
32 beginbfchar
|
| 1903 |
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
| 1904 |
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
| 1905 |
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
| 1906 |
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
| 1907 |
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
| 1908 |
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
| 1909 |
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
| 1910 |
|
|
<0B> <2191>
|
| 1911 |
|
|
<0C> <2193>
|
| 1912 |
|
|
<0D> <0027>
|
| 1913 |
|
|
<0E> <00A1>
|
| 1914 |
|
|
<0F> <00BF>
|
| 1915 |
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
| 1916 |
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
| 1917 |
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
| 1918 |
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
| 1919 |
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
| 1920 |
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
| 1921 |
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
| 1922 |
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
| 1923 |
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
| 1924 |
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
| 1925 |
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
| 1926 |
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
| 1927 |
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
| 1928 |
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
| 1929 |
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
| 1930 |
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
| 1931 |
|
|
<20> <2423>
|
| 1932 |
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
| 1933 |
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
| 1934 |
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
| 1935 |
|
|
endbfchar
|
| 1936 |
|
|
endcmap
|
| 1937 |
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
| 1938 |
|
|
end
|
| 1939 |
|
|
end
|
| 1940 |
|
|
%%EndResource
|
| 1941 |
|
|
%%EOF
|
| 1942 |
|
|
}\endgroup
|
| 1943 |
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
|
| 1944 |
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
| 1945 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1946 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
| 1947 |
|
|
|
| 1948 |
|
|
|
| 1949 |
|
|
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
| 1950 |
|
|
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
| 1951 |
|
|
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
|
| 1952 |
|
|
% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
|
| 1953 |
|
|
% empty to omit).
|
| 1954 |
|
|
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
| 1955 |
|
|
\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
|
| 1956 |
|
|
\csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
|
| 1957 |
|
|
}
|
| 1958 |
|
|
% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
|
| 1959 |
|
|
\let\cmap\gobble
|
| 1960 |
|
|
% emacs-page end of cmaps
|
| 1961 |
|
|
|
| 1962 |
|
|
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
| 1963 |
|
|
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
| 1964 |
|
|
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
| 1965 |
|
|
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
| 1966 |
|
|
\def\fontprefix{cm}
|
| 1967 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1968 |
|
|
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
| 1969 |
|
|
\def\rmshape{r}
|
| 1970 |
|
|
\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
| 1971 |
|
|
\def\bfshape{b}
|
| 1972 |
|
|
\def\bxshape{bx}
|
| 1973 |
|
|
\def\ttshape{tt}
|
| 1974 |
|
|
\def\ttbshape{tt}
|
| 1975 |
|
|
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
| 1976 |
|
|
\def\itshape{ti}
|
| 1977 |
|
|
\def\itbshape{bxti}
|
| 1978 |
|
|
\def\slshape{sl}
|
| 1979 |
|
|
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
| 1980 |
|
|
\def\sfshape{ss}
|
| 1981 |
|
|
\def\sfbshape{ss}
|
| 1982 |
|
|
\def\scshape{csc}
|
| 1983 |
|
|
\def\scbshape{csc}
|
| 1984 |
|
|
|
| 1985 |
|
|
% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
|
| 1986 |
|
|
% Texinfo.
|
| 1987 |
|
|
%
|
| 1988 |
|
|
\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
|
| 1989 |
|
|
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
|
| 1990 |
|
|
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
|
| 1991 |
|
|
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
|
| 1992 |
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 1993 |
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
| 1994 |
|
|
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 1995 |
|
|
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
| 1996 |
|
|
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 1997 |
|
|
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 1998 |
|
|
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 1999 |
|
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
| 2000 |
|
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| 2001 |
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| 2002 |
|
|
\def\textecsize{1095}
|
| 2003 |
|
|
|
| 2004 |
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
| 2005 |
|
|
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2006 |
|
|
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| 2007 |
|
|
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| 2008 |
|
|
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
| 2009 |
|
|
|
| 2010 |
|
|
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
| 2011 |
|
|
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
| 2012 |
|
|
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2013 |
|
|
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2014 |
|
|
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| 2015 |
|
|
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| 2016 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2017 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2018 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| 2019 |
|
|
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
| 2020 |
|
|
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
| 2021 |
|
|
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
| 2022 |
|
|
\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
| 2023 |
|
|
|
| 2024 |
|
|
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
| 2025 |
|
|
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
| 2026 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2027 |
|
|
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2028 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
| 2029 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| 2030 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2031 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2032 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
| 2033 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
| 2034 |
|
|
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
| 2035 |
|
|
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
| 2036 |
|
|
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
| 2037 |
|
|
|
| 2038 |
|
|
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
| 2039 |
|
|
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
| 2040 |
|
|
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
| 2041 |
|
|
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
| 2042 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
| 2043 |
|
|
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
| 2044 |
|
|
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
| 2045 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2046 |
|
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
| 2047 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
| 2048 |
|
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
| 2049 |
|
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
| 2050 |
|
|
\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
| 2051 |
|
|
|
| 2052 |
|
|
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
| 2053 |
|
|
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
|
| 2054 |
|
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| 2055 |
|
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
|
| 2056 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
| 2057 |
|
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
| 2058 |
|
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
| 2059 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2060 |
|
|
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
| 2061 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
| 2062 |
|
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
| 2063 |
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
| 2064 |
|
|
\def\chapecsize{1728}
|
| 2065 |
|
|
|
| 2066 |
|
|
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
| 2067 |
|
|
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
|
| 2068 |
|
|
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2069 |
|
|
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
| 2070 |
|
|
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| 2071 |
|
|
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| 2072 |
|
|
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
| 2073 |
|
|
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2074 |
|
|
\let\secbf\secrm
|
| 2075 |
|
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| 2076 |
|
|
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
| 2077 |
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
| 2078 |
|
|
\def\sececsize{1440}
|
| 2079 |
|
|
|
| 2080 |
|
|
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
| 2081 |
|
|
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
|
| 2082 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
| 2083 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
|
| 2084 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
| 2085 |
|
|
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
| 2086 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
|
| 2087 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
| 2088 |
|
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
| 2089 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
| 2090 |
|
|
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
| 2091 |
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
| 2092 |
|
|
\def\ssececsize{1200}
|
| 2093 |
|
|
|
| 2094 |
|
|
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
|
| 2095 |
|
|
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
|
| 2096 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2097 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2098 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2099 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| 2100 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2101 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2102 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2103 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2104 |
|
|
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
|
| 2105 |
|
|
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
|
| 2106 |
|
|
\def\reducedecsize{1000}
|
| 2107 |
|
|
|
| 2108 |
|
|
% reset the current fonts
|
| 2109 |
|
|
\textfonts
|
| 2110 |
|
|
\rm
|
| 2111 |
|
|
} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
|
| 2112 |
|
|
|
| 2113 |
|
|
|
| 2114 |
|
|
% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
|
| 2115 |
|
|
% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
|
| 2116 |
|
|
% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
|
| 2117 |
|
|
% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
|
| 2118 |
|
|
%
|
| 2119 |
|
|
\def\definetextfontsizex{%
|
| 2120 |
|
|
% Text fonts (10pt).
|
| 2121 |
|
|
\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
|
| 2122 |
|
|
\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
|
| 2123 |
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 2124 |
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
| 2125 |
|
|
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 2126 |
|
|
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
| 2127 |
|
|
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 2128 |
|
|
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 2129 |
|
|
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| 2130 |
|
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
| 2131 |
|
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| 2132 |
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| 2133 |
|
|
\def\textecsize{1000}
|
| 2134 |
|
|
|
| 2135 |
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
| 2136 |
|
|
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
| 2137 |
|
|
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
| 2138 |
|
|
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
| 2139 |
|
|
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
| 2140 |
|
|
|
| 2141 |
|
|
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
| 2142 |
|
|
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
| 2143 |
|
|
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2144 |
|
|
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2145 |
|
|
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| 2146 |
|
|
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| 2147 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2148 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2149 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| 2150 |
|
|
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
| 2151 |
|
|
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
| 2152 |
|
|
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
| 2153 |
|
|
\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
| 2154 |
|
|
|
| 2155 |
|
|
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
| 2156 |
|
|
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
| 2157 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2158 |
|
|
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2159 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
| 2160 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| 2161 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2162 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2163 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
| 2164 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
| 2165 |
|
|
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
| 2166 |
|
|
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
| 2167 |
|
|
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
| 2168 |
|
|
|
| 2169 |
|
|
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
| 2170 |
|
|
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
| 2171 |
|
|
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
| 2172 |
|
|
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
| 2173 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
| 2174 |
|
|
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
| 2175 |
|
|
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
| 2176 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2177 |
|
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
| 2178 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
| 2179 |
|
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
| 2180 |
|
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
| 2181 |
|
|
\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
| 2182 |
|
|
|
| 2183 |
|
|
% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
|
| 2184 |
|
|
\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
|
| 2185 |
|
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2186 |
|
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
| 2187 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| 2188 |
|
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| 2189 |
|
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
| 2190 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2191 |
|
|
\let\chapbf\chaprm
|
| 2192 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| 2193 |
|
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
| 2194 |
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
| 2195 |
|
|
\def\chapecsize{1440}
|
| 2196 |
|
|
|
| 2197 |
|
|
% Section fonts (12pt).
|
| 2198 |
|
|
\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
|
| 2199 |
|
|
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2200 |
|
|
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
|
| 2201 |
|
|
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2202 |
|
|
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2203 |
|
|
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| 2204 |
|
|
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2205 |
|
|
\let\secbf\secrm
|
| 2206 |
|
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| 2207 |
|
|
\font\seci=cmmi12
|
| 2208 |
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
|
| 2209 |
|
|
\def\sececsize{1200}
|
| 2210 |
|
|
|
| 2211 |
|
|
% Subsection fonts (10pt).
|
| 2212 |
|
|
\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
|
| 2213 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2214 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| 2215 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2216 |
|
|
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2217 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2218 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2219 |
|
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
| 2220 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2221 |
|
|
\font\sseci=cmmi10
|
| 2222 |
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
|
| 2223 |
|
|
\def\ssececsize{1000}
|
| 2224 |
|
|
|
| 2225 |
|
|
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
|
| 2226 |
|
|
\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
|
| 2227 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2228 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2229 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| 2230 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| 2231 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2232 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2233 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| 2234 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
| 2235 |
|
|
\font\reducedi=cmmi9
|
| 2236 |
|
|
\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
|
| 2237 |
|
|
\def\reducedecsize{0900}
|
| 2238 |
|
|
|
| 2239 |
|
|
% reduce space between paragraphs
|
| 2240 |
|
|
\divide\parskip by 2
|
| 2241 |
|
|
|
| 2242 |
|
|
% reset the current fonts
|
| 2243 |
|
|
\textfonts
|
| 2244 |
|
|
\rm
|
| 2245 |
|
|
} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
|
| 2246 |
|
|
|
| 2247 |
|
|
|
| 2248 |
|
|
% We provide the user-level command
|
| 2249 |
|
|
% @fonttextsize 10
|
| 2250 |
|
|
% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
|
| 2251 |
|
|
%
|
| 2252 |
|
|
\def\xword{10}
|
| 2253 |
|
|
\def\xiword{11}
|
| 2254 |
|
|
%
|
| 2255 |
|
|
\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
|
| 2256 |
|
|
\def\textsizearg{#1}%
|
| 2257 |
|
|
\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
|
| 2258 |
|
|
%
|
| 2259 |
|
|
% Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
|
| 2260 |
|
|
% makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
|
| 2261 |
|
|
%
|
| 2262 |
|
|
\begingroup \globaldefs=1
|
| 2263 |
|
|
\ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
|
| 2264 |
|
|
\else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
|
| 2265 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2266 |
|
|
\errhelp=\EMsimple
|
| 2267 |
|
|
\errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
|
| 2268 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
| 2269 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 2270 |
|
|
}
|
| 2271 |
|
|
|
| 2272 |
|
|
|
| 2273 |
|
|
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
| 2274 |
|
|
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
| 2275 |
|
|
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
|
| 2276 |
|
|
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
|
| 2277 |
|
|
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
| 2278 |
|
|
%
|
| 2279 |
|
|
\def\resetmathfonts{%
|
| 2280 |
|
|
\textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
|
| 2281 |
|
|
\textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
|
| 2282 |
|
|
\textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
|
| 2283 |
|
|
}
|
| 2284 |
|
|
|
| 2285 |
|
|
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
| 2286 |
|
|
% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
|
| 2287 |
|
|
% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
|
| 2288 |
|
|
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
|
| 2289 |
|
|
%
|
| 2290 |
|
|
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
|
| 2291 |
|
|
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
|
| 2292 |
|
|
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
|
| 2293 |
|
|
%
|
| 2294 |
|
|
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
|
| 2295 |
|
|
%
|
| 2296 |
|
|
\def\textfonts{%
|
| 2297 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
| 2298 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
| 2299 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
|
| 2300 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
| 2301 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{text}%
|
| 2302 |
|
|
\def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
| 2303 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
|
| 2304 |
|
|
\def\titlefonts{%
|
| 2305 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
| 2306 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
| 2307 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
| 2308 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
| 2309 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{title}%
|
| 2310 |
|
|
\def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
|
| 2311 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
|
| 2312 |
|
|
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
|
| 2313 |
|
|
\def\chapfonts{%
|
| 2314 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
| 2315 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
| 2316 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
|
| 2317 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
| 2318 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{chap}%
|
| 2319 |
|
|
\def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
|
| 2320 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
| 2321 |
|
|
\def\secfonts{%
|
| 2322 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
| 2323 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
| 2324 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
|
| 2325 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
| 2326 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{sec}%
|
| 2327 |
|
|
\def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
|
| 2328 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
| 2329 |
|
|
\def\subsecfonts{%
|
| 2330 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
| 2331 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
| 2332 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
|
| 2333 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
| 2334 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{ssec}%
|
| 2335 |
|
|
\def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
|
| 2336 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
| 2337 |
|
|
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
|
| 2338 |
|
|
\def\reducedfonts{%
|
| 2339 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
|
| 2340 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
|
| 2341 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
|
| 2342 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
|
| 2343 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{reduced}%
|
| 2344 |
|
|
\def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
| 2345 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
| 2346 |
|
|
\def\smallfonts{%
|
| 2347 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
|
| 2348 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
|
| 2349 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
|
| 2350 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
|
| 2351 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{small}%
|
| 2352 |
|
|
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
| 2353 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
| 2354 |
|
|
\def\smallerfonts{%
|
| 2355 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
|
| 2356 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
|
| 2357 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
|
| 2358 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
|
| 2359 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{smaller}%
|
| 2360 |
|
|
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
| 2361 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
|
| 2362 |
|
|
|
| 2363 |
|
|
% Fonts for short table of contents.
|
| 2364 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2365 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
|
| 2366 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2367 |
|
|
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| 2368 |
|
|
|
| 2369 |
|
|
% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
| 2370 |
|
|
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
| 2371 |
|
|
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
| 2372 |
|
|
|
| 2373 |
|
|
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
|
| 2374 |
|
|
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
|
| 2375 |
|
|
|
| 2376 |
|
|
% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
|
| 2377 |
|
|
% can fit this many characters:
|
| 2378 |
|
|
% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
|
| 2379 |
|
|
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
|
| 2380 |
|
|
% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
|
| 2381 |
|
|
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
|
| 2382 |
|
|
% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
|
| 2383 |
|
|
%
|
| 2384 |
|
|
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
|
| 2385 |
|
|
% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
|
| 2386 |
|
|
% --karl, 24jan03.
|
| 2387 |
|
|
|
| 2388 |
|
|
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
| 2389 |
|
|
%
|
| 2390 |
|
|
\definetextfontsizexi
|
| 2391 |
|
|
|
| 2392 |
|
|
|
| 2393 |
|
|
\message{markup,}
|
| 2394 |
|
|
|
| 2395 |
|
|
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
| 2396 |
|
|
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
| 2397 |
|
|
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
| 2398 |
|
|
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
| 2399 |
|
|
%
|
| 2400 |
|
|
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
| 2401 |
|
|
|
| 2402 |
|
|
% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
|
| 2403 |
|
|
% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
|
| 2404 |
|
|
% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
|
| 2405 |
|
|
% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
|
| 2406 |
|
|
% currently in effect.
|
| 2407 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupvar
|
| 2408 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupsamp
|
| 2409 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupkey
|
| 2410 |
|
|
%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
|
| 2411 |
|
|
%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
|
| 2412 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupcode
|
| 2413 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupkbd
|
| 2414 |
|
|
%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
|
| 2415 |
|
|
%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
|
| 2416 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
|
| 2417 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupexample
|
| 2418 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupverb
|
| 2419 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
|
| 2420 |
|
|
|
| 2421 |
|
|
\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
|
| 2422 |
|
|
|
| 2423 |
|
|
\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
|
| 2424 |
|
|
\csname markup#1true\endcsname
|
| 2425 |
|
|
\def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
|
| 2426 |
|
|
\markupstylesetup
|
| 2427 |
|
|
}
|
| 2428 |
|
|
|
| 2429 |
|
|
\let\markupstylesetup\empty
|
| 2430 |
|
|
|
| 2431 |
|
|
\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
|
| 2432 |
|
|
\expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
|
| 2433 |
|
|
\expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
|
| 2434 |
|
|
\def#1%
|
| 2435 |
|
|
}
|
| 2436 |
|
|
|
| 2437 |
|
|
% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
|
| 2438 |
|
|
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
|
| 2439 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
| 2440 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
| 2441 |
|
|
}
|
| 2442 |
|
|
|
| 2443 |
|
|
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
|
| 2444 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
| 2445 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
| 2446 |
|
|
}
|
| 2447 |
|
|
|
| 2448 |
|
|
{
|
| 2449 |
|
|
\catcode`\'=\active
|
| 2450 |
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active
|
| 2451 |
|
|
|
| 2452 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
|
| 2453 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
|
| 2454 |
|
|
|
| 2455 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
|
| 2456 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
|
| 2457 |
|
|
|
| 2458 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
|
| 2459 |
|
|
}
|
| 2460 |
|
|
|
| 2461 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
| 2462 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
|
| 2463 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
| 2464 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
|
| 2465 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
| 2466 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
|
| 2467 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
| 2468 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
|
| 2469 |
|
|
|
| 2470 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
|
| 2471 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
|
| 2472 |
|
|
|
| 2473 |
|
|
% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
|
| 2474 |
|
|
% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
|
| 2475 |
|
|
% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
|
| 2476 |
|
|
% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
|
| 2477 |
|
|
% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the
|
| 2478 |
|
|
% regular 0x27.
|
| 2479 |
|
|
%
|
| 2480 |
|
|
\def\codequoteright{%
|
| 2481 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
| 2482 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
| 2483 |
|
|
'%
|
| 2484 |
|
|
\else \char'15 \fi
|
| 2485 |
|
|
\else \char'15 \fi
|
| 2486 |
|
|
}
|
| 2487 |
|
|
%
|
| 2488 |
|
|
% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
|
| 2489 |
|
|
% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
|
| 2490 |
|
|
% the code environments to do likewise.
|
| 2491 |
|
|
%
|
| 2492 |
|
|
\def\codequoteleft{%
|
| 2493 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
| 2494 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
| 2495 |
|
|
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
|
| 2496 |
|
|
% \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
| 2497 |
|
|
\relax`%
|
| 2498 |
|
|
\else \char'22 \fi
|
| 2499 |
|
|
\else \char'22 \fi
|
| 2500 |
|
|
}
|
| 2501 |
|
|
|
| 2502 |
|
|
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
| 2503 |
|
|
\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
|
| 2504 |
|
|
|
| 2505 |
|
|
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
| 2506 |
|
|
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
| 2507 |
|
|
|
| 2508 |
|
|
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
|
| 2509 |
|
|
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
|
| 2510 |
|
|
|
| 2511 |
|
|
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
|
| 2512 |
|
|
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
|
| 2513 |
|
|
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
|
| 2514 |
|
|
\ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
|
| 2515 |
|
|
\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| 2516 |
|
|
\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| 2517 |
|
|
|
| 2518 |
|
|
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
|
| 2519 |
|
|
% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
|
| 2520 |
|
|
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| 2521 |
|
|
|
| 2522 |
|
|
% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
|
| 2523 |
|
|
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
|
| 2524 |
|
|
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| 2525 |
|
|
|
| 2526 |
|
|
\let\i=\smartitalic
|
| 2527 |
|
|
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
|
| 2528 |
|
|
\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}}
|
| 2529 |
|
|
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
| 2530 |
|
|
\let\emph=\smartitalic
|
| 2531 |
|
|
|
| 2532 |
|
|
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
| 2533 |
|
|
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
| 2534 |
|
|
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
| 2535 |
|
|
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
| 2536 |
|
|
|
| 2537 |
|
|
% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
|
| 2538 |
|
|
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
| 2539 |
|
|
\let\strong=\b
|
| 2540 |
|
|
|
| 2541 |
|
|
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
|
| 2542 |
|
|
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
|
| 2543 |
|
|
|
| 2544 |
|
|
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
| 2545 |
|
|
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
| 2546 |
|
|
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
| 2547 |
|
|
%
|
| 2548 |
|
|
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
| 2549 |
|
|
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
| 2550 |
|
|
|
| 2551 |
|
|
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
| 2552 |
|
|
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
|
| 2553 |
|
|
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
|
| 2554 |
|
|
%
|
| 2555 |
|
|
\catcode`@=11
|
| 2556 |
|
|
\def\plainfrenchspacing{%
|
| 2557 |
|
|
\sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
|
| 2558 |
|
|
\sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
|
| 2559 |
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
|
| 2560 |
|
|
}
|
| 2561 |
|
|
\def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
|
| 2562 |
|
|
\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
|
| 2563 |
|
|
\sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
|
| 2564 |
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
|
| 2565 |
|
|
}
|
| 2566 |
|
|
\catcode`@=\other
|
| 2567 |
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
|
| 2568 |
|
|
|
| 2569 |
|
|
% @t, explicit typewriter.
|
| 2570 |
|
|
\def\t#1{%
|
| 2571 |
|
|
{\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
| 2572 |
|
|
\null
|
| 2573 |
|
|
}
|
| 2574 |
|
|
|
| 2575 |
|
|
% @samp.
|
| 2576 |
|
|
\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
|
| 2577 |
|
|
|
| 2578 |
|
|
% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
|
| 2579 |
|
|
%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| 2580 |
|
|
%\font\keysy=cmsy9
|
| 2581 |
|
|
%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
| 2582 |
|
|
% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
| 2583 |
|
|
% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
| 2584 |
|
|
% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
| 2585 |
|
|
% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
| 2586 |
|
|
% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
| 2587 |
|
|
|
| 2588 |
|
|
% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
|
| 2589 |
|
|
% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
|
| 2590 |
|
|
% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
|
| 2591 |
|
|
%
|
| 2592 |
|
|
\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
|
| 2593 |
|
|
\nohyphenation
|
| 2594 |
|
|
\ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
|
| 2595 |
|
|
#1}\null}
|
| 2596 |
|
|
|
| 2597 |
|
|
% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command.
|
| 2598 |
|
|
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
| 2599 |
|
|
|
| 2600 |
|
|
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
|
| 2601 |
|
|
\let\file=\samp
|
| 2602 |
|
|
\let\option=\samp
|
| 2603 |
|
|
|
| 2604 |
|
|
% @code is a modification of @t,
|
| 2605 |
|
|
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
| 2606 |
|
|
\def\tclose#1{%
|
| 2607 |
|
|
{%
|
| 2608 |
|
|
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
| 2609 |
|
|
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
| 2610 |
|
|
%
|
| 2611 |
|
|
% Switch to typewriter.
|
| 2612 |
|
|
\tt
|
| 2613 |
|
|
%
|
| 2614 |
|
|
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
| 2615 |
|
|
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
| 2616 |
|
|
%
|
| 2617 |
|
|
% Turn off hyphenation.
|
| 2618 |
|
|
\nohyphenation
|
| 2619 |
|
|
%
|
| 2620 |
|
|
\rawbackslash
|
| 2621 |
|
|
\plainfrenchspacing
|
| 2622 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 2623 |
|
|
}%
|
| 2624 |
|
|
\null
|
| 2625 |
|
|
}
|
| 2626 |
|
|
|
| 2627 |
|
|
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
|
| 2628 |
|
|
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
| 2629 |
|
|
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
| 2630 |
|
|
|
| 2631 |
|
|
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
| 2632 |
|
|
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
| 2633 |
|
|
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
| 2634 |
|
|
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
| 2635 |
|
|
% -- rms.
|
| 2636 |
|
|
{
|
| 2637 |
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
| 2638 |
|
|
\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
|
| 2639 |
|
|
\global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
|
| 2640 |
|
|
%
|
| 2641 |
|
|
\global\def\code{\begingroup
|
| 2642 |
|
|
\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
|
| 2643 |
|
|
% The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
|
| 2644 |
|
|
\catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
|
| 2645 |
|
|
\ifallowcodebreaks
|
| 2646 |
|
|
\let-\codedash
|
| 2647 |
|
|
\let_\codeunder
|
| 2648 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2649 |
|
|
\let-\realdash
|
| 2650 |
|
|
\let_\realunder
|
| 2651 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2652 |
|
|
\codex
|
| 2653 |
|
|
}
|
| 2654 |
|
|
}
|
| 2655 |
|
|
|
| 2656 |
|
|
\def\realdash{-}
|
| 2657 |
|
|
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
| 2658 |
|
|
\def\codeunder{%
|
| 2659 |
|
|
% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
|
| 2660 |
|
|
% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
|
| 2661 |
|
|
% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
|
| 2662 |
|
|
% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
|
| 2663 |
|
|
\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
|
| 2664 |
|
|
\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
|
| 2665 |
|
|
\else\normalunderscore \fi
|
| 2666 |
|
|
\discretionary{}{}{}}%
|
| 2667 |
|
|
{\_}%
|
| 2668 |
|
|
}
|
| 2669 |
|
|
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
| 2670 |
|
|
|
| 2671 |
|
|
% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
|
| 2672 |
|
|
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
|
| 2673 |
|
|
% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
|
| 2674 |
|
|
% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
|
| 2675 |
|
|
%
|
| 2676 |
|
|
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
|
| 2677 |
|
|
|
| 2678 |
|
|
\def\keywordtrue{true}
|
| 2679 |
|
|
\def\keywordfalse{false}
|
| 2680 |
|
|
|
| 2681 |
|
|
\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
|
| 2682 |
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
| 2683 |
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
|
| 2684 |
|
|
\allowcodebreakstrue
|
| 2685 |
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
|
| 2686 |
|
|
\allowcodebreaksfalse
|
| 2687 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2688 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| 2689 |
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
|
| 2690 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
| 2691 |
|
|
}
|
| 2692 |
|
|
|
| 2693 |
|
|
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
| 2694 |
|
|
% then @kbd has no effect.
|
| 2695 |
|
|
\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
|
| 2696 |
|
|
|
| 2697 |
|
|
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
| 2698 |
|
|
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
| 2699 |
|
|
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
| 2700 |
|
|
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
|
| 2701 |
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
| 2702 |
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
|
| 2703 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
| 2704 |
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
|
| 2705 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
| 2706 |
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
|
| 2707 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
| 2708 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2709 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| 2710 |
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
|
| 2711 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 2712 |
|
|
}
|
| 2713 |
|
|
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
| 2714 |
|
|
\def\wordexample{example}
|
| 2715 |
|
|
\def\wordcode{code}
|
| 2716 |
|
|
|
| 2717 |
|
|
% Default is `distinct'.
|
| 2718 |
|
|
\kbdinputstyle distinct
|
| 2719 |
|
|
|
| 2720 |
|
|
\def\xkey{\key}
|
| 2721 |
|
|
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
| 2722 |
|
|
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
| 2723 |
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
|
| 2724 |
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
|
| 2725 |
|
|
|
| 2726 |
|
|
% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
|
| 2727 |
|
|
\let\indicateurl=\code
|
| 2728 |
|
|
\let\env=\code
|
| 2729 |
|
|
\let\command=\code
|
| 2730 |
|
|
|
| 2731 |
|
|
% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
|
| 2732 |
|
|
\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
|
| 2733 |
|
|
|
| 2734 |
|
|
% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
|
| 2735 |
|
|
\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
|
| 2736 |
|
|
\def\click{\arrow}
|
| 2737 |
|
|
|
| 2738 |
|
|
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
|
| 2739 |
|
|
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
|
| 2740 |
|
|
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
|
| 2741 |
|
|
% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
|
| 2742 |
|
|
% a hypertex \special here.
|
| 2743 |
|
|
%
|
| 2744 |
|
|
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
|
| 2745 |
|
|
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
|
| 2746 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
| 2747 |
|
|
\pdfurl{#1}%
|
| 2748 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
| 2749 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| 2750 |
|
|
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
| 2751 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2752 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 2753 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| 2754 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 2755 |
|
|
\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
|
| 2756 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2757 |
|
|
\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
|
| 2758 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2759 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2760 |
|
|
\code{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
| 2761 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2762 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2763 |
|
|
\endlink
|
| 2764 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 2765 |
|
|
|
| 2766 |
|
|
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
|
| 2767 |
|
|
%
|
| 2768 |
|
|
\let\url=\uref
|
| 2769 |
|
|
|
| 2770 |
|
|
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
| 2771 |
|
|
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
| 2772 |
|
|
%
|
| 2773 |
|
|
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
| 2774 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 2775 |
|
|
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
| 2776 |
|
|
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
| 2777 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
| 2778 |
|
|
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
| 2779 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 2780 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
| 2781 |
|
|
\endlink
|
| 2782 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 2783 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2784 |
|
|
\let\email=\uref
|
| 2785 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2786 |
|
|
|
| 2787 |
|
|
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
| 2788 |
|
|
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
| 2789 |
|
|
%
|
| 2790 |
|
|
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
| 2791 |
|
|
|
| 2792 |
|
|
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
| 2793 |
|
|
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
| 2794 |
|
|
% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
| 2795 |
|
|
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
| 2796 |
|
|
|
| 2797 |
|
|
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
|
| 2798 |
|
|
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
|
| 2799 |
|
|
% all-uppercase.
|
| 2800 |
|
|
%
|
| 2801 |
|
|
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
|
| 2802 |
|
|
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
| 2803 |
|
|
{\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
|
| 2804 |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
| 2805 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
| 2806 |
|
|
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
| 2807 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2808 |
|
|
}
|
| 2809 |
|
|
|
| 2810 |
|
|
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
|
| 2811 |
|
|
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
|
| 2812 |
|
|
%
|
| 2813 |
|
|
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
|
| 2814 |
|
|
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
| 2815 |
|
|
{\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
| 2816 |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
| 2817 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
| 2818 |
|
|
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
| 2819 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2820 |
|
|
}
|
| 2821 |
|
|
|
| 2822 |
|
|
|
| 2823 |
|
|
\message{glyphs,}
|
| 2824 |
|
|
|
| 2825 |
|
|
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
| 2826 |
|
|
%
|
| 2827 |
|
|
% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
|
| 2828 |
|
|
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
| 2829 |
|
|
%
|
| 2830 |
|
|
\def\point{$\star$}
|
| 2831 |
|
|
\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
| 2832 |
|
|
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
| 2833 |
|
|
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
| 2834 |
|
|
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
| 2835 |
|
|
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
| 2836 |
|
|
|
| 2837 |
|
|
% The @error{} command.
|
| 2838 |
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
| 2839 |
|
|
%
|
| 2840 |
|
|
\newbox\errorbox
|
| 2841 |
|
|
%
|
| 2842 |
|
|
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
| 2843 |
|
|
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
| 2844 |
|
|
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
| 2845 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
| 2846 |
|
|
%
|
| 2847 |
|
|
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
| 2848 |
|
|
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
| 2849 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
| 2850 |
|
|
\vbox{%
|
| 2851 |
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2
|
| 2852 |
|
|
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
| 2853 |
|
|
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
| 2854 |
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
| 2855 |
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2}
|
| 2856 |
|
|
\hfil}
|
| 2857 |
|
|
%
|
| 2858 |
|
|
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
| 2859 |
|
|
|
| 2860 |
|
|
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
|
| 2861 |
|
|
%
|
| 2862 |
|
|
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
| 2863 |
|
|
|
| 2864 |
|
|
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
|
| 2865 |
|
|
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
|
| 2866 |
|
|
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
|
| 2867 |
|
|
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
|
| 2868 |
|
|
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
|
| 2869 |
|
|
%
|
| 2870 |
|
|
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
|
| 2871 |
|
|
% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
|
| 2872 |
|
|
% font height.
|
| 2873 |
|
|
%
|
| 2874 |
|
|
% feymr - regular
|
| 2875 |
|
|
% feymo - slanted
|
| 2876 |
|
|
% feybr - bold
|
| 2877 |
|
|
% feybo - bold slanted
|
| 2878 |
|
|
%
|
| 2879 |
|
|
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
|
| 2880 |
|
|
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
|
| 2881 |
|
|
% Hmm.
|
| 2882 |
|
|
%
|
| 2883 |
|
|
% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
|
| 2884 |
|
|
% Hope not.
|
| 2885 |
|
|
%
|
| 2886 |
|
|
%
|
| 2887 |
|
|
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
|
| 2888 |
|
|
\def\eurofont{%
|
| 2889 |
|
|
% We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
|
| 2890 |
|
|
% \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
|
| 2891 |
|
|
% installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
|
| 2892 |
|
|
% font installed.
|
| 2893 |
|
|
%
|
| 2894 |
|
|
% There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
|
| 2895 |
|
|
% that to the current nominal size.
|
| 2896 |
|
|
%
|
| 2897 |
|
|
% By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
|
| 2898 |
|
|
% does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
|
| 2899 |
|
|
%
|
| 2900 |
|
|
\def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
| 2901 |
|
|
%
|
| 2902 |
|
|
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
| 2903 |
|
|
% bold:
|
| 2904 |
|
|
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
|
| 2905 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2906 |
|
|
% regular:
|
| 2907 |
|
|
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
|
| 2908 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2909 |
|
|
\thiseurofont
|
| 2910 |
|
|
}
|
| 2911 |
|
|
|
| 2912 |
|
|
% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
|
| 2913 |
|
|
% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
|
| 2914 |
|
|
% the redefinition.
|
| 2915 |
|
|
%
|
| 2916 |
|
|
% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
|
| 2917 |
|
|
\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
|
| 2918 |
|
|
\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
|
| 2919 |
|
|
\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
|
| 2920 |
|
|
\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
|
| 2921 |
|
|
%
|
| 2922 |
|
|
\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
|
| 2923 |
|
|
\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
|
| 2924 |
|
|
\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
|
| 2925 |
|
|
\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
|
| 2926 |
|
|
\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
|
| 2927 |
|
|
\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
|
| 2928 |
|
|
\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
|
| 2929 |
|
|
\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
|
| 2930 |
|
|
%
|
| 2931 |
|
|
% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
|
| 2932 |
|
|
% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
|
| 2933 |
|
|
% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
|
| 2934 |
|
|
% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
|
| 2935 |
|
|
%
|
| 2936 |
|
|
% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
|
| 2937 |
|
|
% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
|
| 2938 |
|
|
% the same EC font.
|
| 2939 |
|
|
\def\ogonek#1{{%
|
| 2940 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 2941 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
|
| 2942 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
|
| 2943 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
|
| 2944 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
|
| 2945 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2946 |
|
|
\ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
|
| 2947 |
|
|
\ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
|
| 2948 |
|
|
\else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
|
| 2949 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2950 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
| 2951 |
|
|
}%
|
| 2952 |
|
|
}
|
| 2953 |
|
|
\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
|
| 2954 |
|
|
\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
|
| 2955 |
|
|
\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
|
| 2956 |
|
|
\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
|
| 2957 |
|
|
%
|
| 2958 |
|
|
% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
|
| 2959 |
|
|
\def\ecfont{%
|
| 2960 |
|
|
% We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
|
| 2961 |
|
|
% is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
|
| 2962 |
|
|
% quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
|
| 2963 |
|
|
% hopefully nobody will notice/care.
|
| 2964 |
|
|
\edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
|
| 2965 |
|
|
\edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
| 2966 |
|
|
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
| 2967 |
|
|
% bold:
|
| 2968 |
|
|
\font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
| 2969 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2970 |
|
|
% regular:
|
| 2971 |
|
|
\font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
| 2972 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2973 |
|
|
\thisecfont
|
| 2974 |
|
|
}
|
| 2975 |
|
|
|
| 2976 |
|
|
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
|
| 2977 |
|
|
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
|
| 2978 |
|
|
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
|
| 2979 |
|
|
%
|
| 2980 |
|
|
\def\registeredsymbol{%
|
| 2981 |
|
|
$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
|
| 2982 |
|
|
\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
|
| 2983 |
|
|
}$%
|
| 2984 |
|
|
}
|
| 2985 |
|
|
|
| 2986 |
|
|
% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
|
| 2987 |
|
|
%
|
| 2988 |
|
|
\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
|
| 2989 |
|
|
|
| 2990 |
|
|
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
|
| 2991 |
|
|
% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
|
| 2992 |
|
|
% so we'll define it if necessary.
|
| 2993 |
|
|
%
|
| 2994 |
|
|
\ifx\Orb\undefined
|
| 2995 |
|
|
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
|
| 2996 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2997 |
|
|
|
| 2998 |
|
|
% Quotes.
|
| 2999 |
|
|
\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
|
| 3000 |
|
|
\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
|
| 3001 |
|
|
\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
|
| 3002 |
|
|
\chardef\quoteright=`\'
|
| 3003 |
|
|
|
| 3004 |
|
|
|
| 3005 |
|
|
\message{page headings,}
|
| 3006 |
|
|
|
| 3007 |
|
|
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
| 3008 |
|
|
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
| 3009 |
|
|
|
| 3010 |
|
|
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
| 3011 |
|
|
\newif\ifseenauthor
|
| 3012 |
|
|
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
| 3013 |
|
|
|
| 3014 |
|
|
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
|
| 3015 |
|
|
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
|
| 3016 |
|
|
%
|
| 3017 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| 3018 |
|
|
\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
| 3019 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| 3020 |
|
|
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
| 3021 |
|
|
|
| 3022 |
|
|
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
| 3023 |
|
|
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
| 3024 |
|
|
|
| 3025 |
|
|
\envdef\titlepage{%
|
| 3026 |
|
|
% Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
|
| 3027 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 3028 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
| 3029 |
|
|
% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
| 3030 |
|
|
\vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
| 3031 |
|
|
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
| 3032 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
| 3033 |
|
|
%
|
| 3034 |
|
|
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
| 3035 |
|
|
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
| 3036 |
|
|
\let\oldpage = \page
|
| 3037 |
|
|
\def\page{%
|
| 3038 |
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
| 3039 |
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
| 3040 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3041 |
|
|
\let\page = \oldpage
|
| 3042 |
|
|
\page
|
| 3043 |
|
|
\null
|
| 3044 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3045 |
|
|
}
|
| 3046 |
|
|
|
| 3047 |
|
|
\def\Etitlepage{%
|
| 3048 |
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
| 3049 |
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
| 3050 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3051 |
|
|
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
| 3052 |
|
|
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
| 3053 |
|
|
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
| 3054 |
|
|
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
| 3055 |
|
|
\oldpage
|
| 3056 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 3057 |
|
|
%
|
| 3058 |
|
|
% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
|
| 3059 |
|
|
% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
|
| 3060 |
|
|
\HEADINGSon
|
| 3061 |
|
|
%
|
| 3062 |
|
|
% If they want short, they certainly want long too.
|
| 3063 |
|
|
\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| 3064 |
|
|
\shortcontents
|
| 3065 |
|
|
\contents
|
| 3066 |
|
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
| 3067 |
|
|
\global\let\contents = \relax
|
| 3068 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3069 |
|
|
%
|
| 3070 |
|
|
\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| 3071 |
|
|
\contents
|
| 3072 |
|
|
\global\let\contents = \relax
|
| 3073 |
|
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
| 3074 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3075 |
|
|
}
|
| 3076 |
|
|
|
| 3077 |
|
|
\def\finishtitlepage{%
|
| 3078 |
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
| 3079 |
|
|
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
| 3080 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
| 3081 |
|
|
}
|
| 3082 |
|
|
|
| 3083 |
|
|
%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
|
| 3084 |
|
|
|
| 3085 |
|
|
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
| 3086 |
|
|
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
|
| 3087 |
|
|
|
| 3088 |
|
|
\parseargdef\title{%
|
| 3089 |
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
| 3090 |
|
|
\leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
|
| 3091 |
|
|
% print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
| 3092 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagefalse
|
| 3093 |
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
|
| 3094 |
|
|
}
|
| 3095 |
|
|
|
| 3096 |
|
|
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
|
| 3097 |
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
| 3098 |
|
|
{\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
|
| 3099 |
|
|
}
|
| 3100 |
|
|
|
| 3101 |
|
|
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
| 3102 |
|
|
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
|
| 3103 |
|
|
%
|
| 3104 |
|
|
\parseargdef\author{%
|
| 3105 |
|
|
\def\temp{\quotation}%
|
| 3106 |
|
|
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
| 3107 |
|
|
\def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
|
| 3108 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3109 |
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
| 3110 |
|
|
\ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
|
| 3111 |
|
|
{\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
|
| 3112 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3113 |
|
|
}
|
| 3114 |
|
|
|
| 3115 |
|
|
|
| 3116 |
|
|
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
| 3117 |
|
|
|
| 3118 |
|
|
\let\thispage=\folio
|
| 3119 |
|
|
|
| 3120 |
|
|
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
| 3121 |
|
|
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
| 3122 |
|
|
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
| 3123 |
|
|
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
| 3124 |
|
|
|
| 3125 |
|
|
% Now make TeX use those variables
|
| 3126 |
|
|
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
| 3127 |
|
|
\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
| 3128 |
|
|
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
| 3129 |
|
|
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
| 3130 |
|
|
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
| 3131 |
|
|
|
| 3132 |
|
|
% Commands to set those variables.
|
| 3133 |
|
|
% For example, this is what @headings on does
|
| 3134 |
|
|
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
| 3135 |
|
|
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
| 3136 |
|
|
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
| 3137 |
|
|
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
| 3138 |
|
|
|
| 3139 |
|
|
|
| 3140 |
|
|
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
| 3141 |
|
|
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
| 3142 |
|
|
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
| 3143 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| 3144 |
|
|
|
| 3145 |
|
|
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
| 3146 |
|
|
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
| 3147 |
|
|
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
| 3148 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| 3149 |
|
|
|
| 3150 |
|
|
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
| 3151 |
|
|
|
| 3152 |
|
|
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
| 3153 |
|
|
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
| 3154 |
|
|
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
| 3155 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| 3156 |
|
|
|
| 3157 |
|
|
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
| 3158 |
|
|
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
| 3159 |
|
|
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
| 3160 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
| 3161 |
|
|
%
|
| 3162 |
|
|
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
| 3163 |
|
|
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
| 3164 |
|
|
\global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
|
| 3165 |
|
|
\global\advance\vsize by -12pt
|
| 3166 |
|
|
}
|
| 3167 |
|
|
|
| 3168 |
|
|
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
| 3169 |
|
|
|
| 3170 |
|
|
% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
|
| 3171 |
|
|
% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
|
| 3172 |
|
|
%
|
| 3173 |
|
|
% The same set of arguments for:
|
| 3174 |
|
|
%
|
| 3175 |
|
|
% @oddheadingmarks
|
| 3176 |
|
|
% @evenfootingmarks
|
| 3177 |
|
|
% @oddfootingmarks
|
| 3178 |
|
|
% @everyheadingmarks
|
| 3179 |
|
|
% @everyfootingmarks
|
| 3180 |
|
|
|
| 3181 |
|
|
\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
|
| 3182 |
|
|
\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
|
| 3183 |
|
|
\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
|
| 3184 |
|
|
\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
|
| 3185 |
|
|
\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
|
| 3186 |
|
|
\headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
|
| 3187 |
|
|
\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
|
| 3188 |
|
|
\headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
|
| 3189 |
|
|
% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
|
| 3190 |
|
|
\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
|
| 3191 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
|
| 3192 |
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
|
| 3193 |
|
|
}
|
| 3194 |
|
|
|
| 3195 |
|
|
\everyheadingmarks bottom
|
| 3196 |
|
|
\everyfootingmarks bottom
|
| 3197 |
|
|
|
| 3198 |
|
|
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
| 3199 |
|
|
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
| 3200 |
|
|
% @headings off turns them off.
|
| 3201 |
|
|
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
| 3202 |
|
|
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
| 3203 |
|
|
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
| 3204 |
|
|
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
| 3205 |
|
|
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
| 3206 |
|
|
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
| 3207 |
|
|
|
| 3208 |
|
|
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
| 3209 |
|
|
|
| 3210 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSoff{%
|
| 3211 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3212 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
|
| 3213 |
|
|
\HEADINGSoff
|
| 3214 |
|
|
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
| 3215 |
|
|
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
| 3216 |
|
|
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
| 3217 |
|
|
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
| 3218 |
|
|
% edge of all pages.
|
| 3219 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
|
| 3220 |
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
| 3221 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3222 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3223 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
| 3224 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 3225 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| 3226 |
|
|
}
|
| 3227 |
|
|
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 3228 |
|
|
|
| 3229 |
|
|
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
| 3230 |
|
|
% page number on top right.
|
| 3231 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
|
| 3232 |
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
| 3233 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3234 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3235 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 3236 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 3237 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 3238 |
|
|
}
|
| 3239 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
| 3240 |
|
|
|
| 3241 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
| 3242 |
|
|
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
| 3243 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
| 3244 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3245 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3246 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
| 3247 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 3248 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| 3249 |
|
|
}
|
| 3250 |
|
|
|
| 3251 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
| 3252 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
| 3253 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3254 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| 3255 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 3256 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 3257 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 3258 |
|
|
}
|
| 3259 |
|
|
|
| 3260 |
|
|
% Subroutines used in generating headings
|
| 3261 |
|
|
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
| 3262 |
|
|
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
|
| 3263 |
|
|
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
|
| 3264 |
|
|
\ifx\today\undefined
|
| 3265 |
|
|
\def\today{%
|
| 3266 |
|
|
\number\day\space
|
| 3267 |
|
|
\ifcase\month
|
| 3268 |
|
|
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
| 3269 |
|
|
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
| 3270 |
|
|
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
| 3271 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3272 |
|
|
\space\number\year}
|
| 3273 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3274 |
|
|
|
| 3275 |
|
|
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
| 3276 |
|
|
% It generates no output of its own.
|
| 3277 |
|
|
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
| 3278 |
|
|
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
|
| 3279 |
|
|
|
| 3280 |
|
|
|
| 3281 |
|
|
\message{tables,}
|
| 3282 |
|
|
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
|
| 3283 |
|
|
|
| 3284 |
|
|
% default indentation of table text
|
| 3285 |
|
|
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
| 3286 |
|
|
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
| 3287 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
| 3288 |
|
|
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
| 3289 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
| 3290 |
|
|
|
| 3291 |
|
|
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
| 3292 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemmax
|
| 3293 |
|
|
|
| 3294 |
|
|
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
| 3295 |
|
|
% these defs.
|
| 3296 |
|
|
% They also define \itemindex
|
| 3297 |
|
|
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
| 3298 |
|
|
|
| 3299 |
|
|
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
| 3300 |
|
|
|
| 3301 |
|
|
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
| 3302 |
|
|
|
| 3303 |
|
|
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
| 3304 |
|
|
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
| 3305 |
|
|
|
| 3306 |
|
|
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
| 3307 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
| 3308 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
| 3309 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
|
| 3310 |
|
|
\itemindex{#1}%
|
| 3311 |
|
|
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
| 3312 |
|
|
%
|
| 3313 |
|
|
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
| 3314 |
|
|
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
| 3315 |
|
|
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
| 3316 |
|
|
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
| 3317 |
|
|
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
| 3318 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
| 3319 |
|
|
%
|
| 3320 |
|
|
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
| 3321 |
|
|
% but leave it ragged-right.
|
| 3322 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 3323 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
| 3324 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
| 3325 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
|
| 3326 |
|
|
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
| 3327 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 3328 |
|
|
%
|
| 3329 |
|
|
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
| 3330 |
|
|
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
| 3331 |
|
|
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
| 3332 |
|
|
%
|
| 3333 |
|
|
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
|
| 3334 |
|
|
% what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
|
| 3335 |
|
|
% \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
|
| 3336 |
|
|
% cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
|
| 3337 |
|
|
% bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
|
| 3338 |
|
|
% \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
|
| 3339 |
|
|
%
|
| 3340 |
|
|
\penalty 10001
|
| 3341 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 3342 |
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
| 3343 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3344 |
|
|
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
| 3345 |
|
|
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
| 3346 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 3347 |
|
|
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
| 3348 |
|
|
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
| 3349 |
|
|
% eventually be printed.
|
| 3350 |
|
|
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
| 3351 |
|
|
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
| 3352 |
|
|
\unhbox0
|
| 3353 |
|
|
\nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
| 3354 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 3355 |
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
| 3356 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3357 |
|
|
}
|
| 3358 |
|
|
|
| 3359 |
|
|
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
|
| 3360 |
|
|
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
|
| 3361 |
|
|
|
| 3362 |
|
|
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
| 3363 |
|
|
\envdef\table{%
|
| 3364 |
|
|
\let\itemindex\gobble
|
| 3365 |
|
|
\tablecheck{table}%
|
| 3366 |
|
|
}
|
| 3367 |
|
|
\envdef\ftable{%
|
| 3368 |
|
|
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
|
| 3369 |
|
|
\tablecheck{ftable}%
|
| 3370 |
|
|
}
|
| 3371 |
|
|
\envdef\vtable{%
|
| 3372 |
|
|
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
|
| 3373 |
|
|
\tablecheck{vtable}%
|
| 3374 |
|
|
}
|
| 3375 |
|
|
\def\tablecheck#1{%
|
| 3376 |
|
|
\ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
|
| 3377 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 3378 |
|
|
\errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
|
| 3379 |
|
|
that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
| 3380 |
|
|
\def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
|
| 3381 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3382 |
|
|
\let\next\tablex
|
| 3383 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3384 |
|
|
\next
|
| 3385 |
|
|
}
|
| 3386 |
|
|
\def\tablex#1{%
|
| 3387 |
|
|
\def\itemindicate{#1}%
|
| 3388 |
|
|
\parsearg\tabley
|
| 3389 |
|
|
}
|
| 3390 |
|
|
\def\tabley#1{%
|
| 3391 |
|
|
{%
|
| 3392 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
| 3393 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
|
| 3394 |
|
|
\expandafter
|
| 3395 |
|
|
}\temp \endtablez
|
| 3396 |
|
|
}
|
| 3397 |
|
|
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
|
| 3398 |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
| 3399 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
|
| 3400 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
|
| 3401 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
|
| 3402 |
|
|
\itemmax=\tableindent
|
| 3403 |
|
|
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
| 3404 |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent
|
| 3405 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\tableindent
|
| 3406 |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt
|
| 3407 |
|
|
\parskip = \smallskipamount
|
| 3408 |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
| 3409 |
|
|
\let\item = \internalBitem
|
| 3410 |
|
|
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx
|
| 3411 |
|
|
}
|
| 3412 |
|
|
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
|
| 3413 |
|
|
\let\Eftable\Etable
|
| 3414 |
|
|
\let\Evtable\Etable
|
| 3415 |
|
|
\let\Eitemize\Etable
|
| 3416 |
|
|
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
|
| 3417 |
|
|
|
| 3418 |
|
|
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
| 3419 |
|
|
|
| 3420 |
|
|
\newcount \itemno
|
| 3421 |
|
|
|
| 3422 |
|
|
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
|
| 3423 |
|
|
|
| 3424 |
|
|
\def\doitemize#1{%
|
| 3425 |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
| 3426 |
|
|
\itemmax=\itemindent
|
| 3427 |
|
|
\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
| 3428 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
|
| 3429 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\itemindent
|
| 3430 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
| 3431 |
|
|
\parskip=\smallskipamount
|
| 3432 |
|
|
\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
| 3433 |
|
|
%
|
| 3434 |
|
|
% Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
|
| 3435 |
|
|
% something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
|
| 3436 |
|
|
% right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
|
| 3437 |
|
|
% world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
|
| 3438 |
|
|
% the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
|
| 3439 |
|
|
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
| 3440 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
|
| 3441 |
|
|
%
|
| 3442 |
|
|
% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
|
| 3443 |
|
|
\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
|
| 3444 |
|
|
%
|
| 3445 |
|
|
\let\item=\itemizeitem
|
| 3446 |
|
|
}
|
| 3447 |
|
|
|
| 3448 |
|
|
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
|
| 3449 |
|
|
%
|
| 3450 |
|
|
\def\itemizeitem{%
|
| 3451 |
|
|
\advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
|
| 3452 |
|
|
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
|
| 3453 |
|
|
{%
|
| 3454 |
|
|
% If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
|
| 3455 |
|
|
% \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
|
| 3456 |
|
|
% done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
|
| 3457 |
|
|
% parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
|
| 3458 |
|
|
% other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
|
| 3459 |
|
|
% usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
|
| 3460 |
|
|
% space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
|
| 3461 |
|
|
% that's the theory.
|
| 3462 |
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
|
| 3463 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 3464 |
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
|
| 3465 |
|
|
%
|
| 3466 |
|
|
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
|
| 3467 |
|
|
\flushcr
|
| 3468 |
|
|
}
|
| 3469 |
|
|
|
| 3470 |
|
|
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
| 3471 |
|
|
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
| 3472 |
|
|
%
|
| 3473 |
|
|
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
| 3474 |
|
|
|
| 3475 |
|
|
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
| 3476 |
|
|
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
| 3477 |
|
|
% argument is the same as `1'.
|
| 3478 |
|
|
%
|
| 3479 |
|
|
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
| 3480 |
|
|
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
| 3481 |
|
|
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
| 3482 |
|
|
\def\thearg{#1}%
|
| 3483 |
|
|
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
| 3484 |
|
|
%
|
| 3485 |
|
|
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
| 3486 |
|
|
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
| 3487 |
|
|
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
| 3488 |
|
|
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
| 3489 |
|
|
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
| 3490 |
|
|
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
| 3491 |
|
|
\ifx\rest\empty
|
| 3492 |
|
|
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
| 3493 |
|
|
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
| 3494 |
|
|
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
| 3495 |
|
|
% not equal to itself.
|
| 3496 |
|
|
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
| 3497 |
|
|
%
|
| 3498 |
|
|
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
| 3499 |
|
|
% continuing to look for a <number>.
|
| 3500 |
|
|
%
|
| 3501 |
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
| 3502 |
|
|
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
| 3503 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3504 |
|
|
% It's a letter.
|
| 3505 |
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
| 3506 |
|
|
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
| 3507 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3508 |
|
|
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
| 3509 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3510 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3511 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3512 |
|
|
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
| 3513 |
|
|
\numericenumerate
|
| 3514 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3515 |
|
|
}
|
| 3516 |
|
|
|
| 3517 |
|
|
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
| 3518 |
|
|
% given in \thearg.
|
| 3519 |
|
|
%
|
| 3520 |
|
|
\def\numericenumerate{%
|
| 3521 |
|
|
\itemno = \thearg
|
| 3522 |
|
|
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
| 3523 |
|
|
}
|
| 3524 |
|
|
|
| 3525 |
|
|
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
| 3526 |
|
|
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
| 3527 |
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
| 3528 |
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
| 3529 |
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
| 3530 |
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
| 3531 |
|
|
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
| 3532 |
|
|
alphabet}%
|
| 3533 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3534 |
|
|
\char\lccode\itemno
|
| 3535 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3536 |
|
|
}
|
| 3537 |
|
|
|
| 3538 |
|
|
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
| 3539 |
|
|
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
| 3540 |
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
| 3541 |
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
| 3542 |
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
| 3543 |
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
| 3544 |
|
|
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
| 3545 |
|
|
alphabet}
|
| 3546 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3547 |
|
|
\char\uccode\itemno
|
| 3548 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3549 |
|
|
}
|
| 3550 |
|
|
|
| 3551 |
|
|
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
| 3552 |
|
|
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
| 3553 |
|
|
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
| 3554 |
|
|
%
|
| 3555 |
|
|
\def\startenumeration#1{%
|
| 3556 |
|
|
\advance\itemno by -1
|
| 3557 |
|
|
\doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
|
| 3558 |
|
|
}
|
| 3559 |
|
|
|
| 3560 |
|
|
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
| 3561 |
|
|
% to @enumerate.
|
| 3562 |
|
|
%
|
| 3563 |
|
|
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
| 3564 |
|
|
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
| 3565 |
|
|
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
| 3566 |
|
|
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
| 3567 |
|
|
|
| 3568 |
|
|
|
| 3569 |
|
|
% @multitable macros
|
| 3570 |
|
|
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
| 3571 |
|
|
%
|
| 3572 |
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
| 3573 |
|
|
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
| 3574 |
|
|
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
| 3575 |
|
|
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
| 3576 |
|
|
|
| 3577 |
|
|
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
| 3578 |
|
|
|
| 3579 |
|
|
% To make preamble:
|
| 3580 |
|
|
%
|
| 3581 |
|
|
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
| 3582 |
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
| 3583 |
|
|
% @item ...
|
| 3584 |
|
|
%
|
| 3585 |
|
|
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
| 3586 |
|
|
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
| 3587 |
|
|
% columns as desired.
|
| 3588 |
|
|
|
| 3589 |
|
|
|
| 3590 |
|
|
% Or use a template:
|
| 3591 |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
| 3592 |
|
|
% @item ...
|
| 3593 |
|
|
% using the widest term desired in each column.
|
| 3594 |
|
|
|
| 3595 |
|
|
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
| 3596 |
|
|
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
| 3597 |
|
|
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
| 3598 |
|
|
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
| 3599 |
|
|
|
| 3600 |
|
|
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
|
| 3601 |
|
|
% if they are.
|
| 3602 |
|
|
|
| 3603 |
|
|
% Sample multitable:
|
| 3604 |
|
|
|
| 3605 |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
| 3606 |
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
| 3607 |
|
|
% @item
|
| 3608 |
|
|
% first col stuff
|
| 3609 |
|
|
% @tab
|
| 3610 |
|
|
% second col stuff
|
| 3611 |
|
|
% @tab
|
| 3612 |
|
|
% third col
|
| 3613 |
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
| 3614 |
|
|
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
| 3615 |
|
|
%
|
| 3616 |
|
|
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
| 3617 |
|
|
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
| 3618 |
|
|
% @end multitable
|
| 3619 |
|
|
|
| 3620 |
|
|
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
| 3621 |
|
|
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
| 3622 |
|
|
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
| 3623 |
|
|
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
| 3624 |
|
|
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
| 3625 |
|
|
% to baseline.
|
| 3626 |
|
|
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
| 3627 |
|
|
%
|
| 3628 |
|
|
\newskip\multitableparskip
|
| 3629 |
|
|
\newskip\multitableparindent
|
| 3630 |
|
|
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
| 3631 |
|
|
\newskip\multitablelinespace
|
| 3632 |
|
|
\multitableparskip=0pt
|
| 3633 |
|
|
\multitableparindent=6pt
|
| 3634 |
|
|
\multitablecolspace=12pt
|
| 3635 |
|
|
\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
| 3636 |
|
|
|
| 3637 |
|
|
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
| 3638 |
|
|
%
|
| 3639 |
|
|
\let\endsetuptable\relax
|
| 3640 |
|
|
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
| 3641 |
|
|
\let\columnfractions\relax
|
| 3642 |
|
|
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
| 3643 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetpercent
|
| 3644 |
|
|
|
| 3645 |
|
|
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
|
| 3646 |
|
|
% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
|
| 3647 |
|
|
%
|
| 3648 |
|
|
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
|
| 3649 |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
| 3650 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
|
| 3651 |
|
|
\setuptable
|
| 3652 |
|
|
}
|
| 3653 |
|
|
|
| 3654 |
|
|
\newcount\colcount
|
| 3655 |
|
|
\def\setuptable#1{%
|
| 3656 |
|
|
\def\firstarg{#1}%
|
| 3657 |
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
| 3658 |
|
|
\let\go = \relax
|
| 3659 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3660 |
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
| 3661 |
|
|
\global\setpercenttrue
|
| 3662 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3663 |
|
|
\ifsetpercent
|
| 3664 |
|
|
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
| 3665 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3666 |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
| 3667 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
|
| 3668 |
|
|
% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
| 3669 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
| 3670 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3671 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3672 |
|
|
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
| 3673 |
|
|
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
| 3674 |
|
|
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
| 3675 |
|
|
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
| 3676 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3677 |
|
|
\let\go = \setuptable
|
| 3678 |
|
|
\fi%
|
| 3679 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3680 |
|
|
\go
|
| 3681 |
|
|
}
|
| 3682 |
|
|
|
| 3683 |
|
|
% multitable-only commands.
|
| 3684 |
|
|
%
|
| 3685 |
|
|
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
|
| 3686 |
|
|
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
|
| 3687 |
|
|
% of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
|
| 3688 |
|
|
% undo it ourselves.
|
| 3689 |
|
|
\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
|
| 3690 |
|
|
\def\headitem{%
|
| 3691 |
|
|
\checkenv\multitable
|
| 3692 |
|
|
\crcr
|
| 3693 |
|
|
\global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
|
| 3694 |
|
|
\the\everytab % for the first item
|
| 3695 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3696 |
|
|
%
|
| 3697 |
|
|
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
|
| 3698 |
|
|
% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
|
| 3699 |
|
|
% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
|
| 3700 |
|
|
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
| 3701 |
|
|
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
|
| 3702 |
|
|
|
| 3703 |
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
| 3704 |
|
|
%
|
| 3705 |
|
|
\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
|
| 3706 |
|
|
%
|
| 3707 |
|
|
\envdef\multitable{%
|
| 3708 |
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
| 3709 |
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
| 3710 |
|
|
%
|
| 3711 |
|
|
% @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
|
| 3712 |
|
|
% We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
|
| 3713 |
|
|
% contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
|
| 3714 |
|
|
% \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
|
| 3715 |
|
|
\def\item{\crcr}%
|
| 3716 |
|
|
%
|
| 3717 |
|
|
\tolerance=9500
|
| 3718 |
|
|
\hbadness=9500
|
| 3719 |
|
|
\setmultitablespacing
|
| 3720 |
|
|
\parskip=\multitableparskip
|
| 3721 |
|
|
\parindent=\multitableparindent
|
| 3722 |
|
|
\overfullrule=0pt
|
| 3723 |
|
|
\global\colcount=0
|
| 3724 |
|
|
%
|
| 3725 |
|
|
\everycr = {%
|
| 3726 |
|
|
\noalign{%
|
| 3727 |
|
|
\global\everytab={}%
|
| 3728 |
|
|
\global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
|
| 3729 |
|
|
% Check for saved footnotes, etc.
|
| 3730 |
|
|
\checkinserts
|
| 3731 |
|
|
% Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
| 3732 |
|
|
%\filbreak
|
| 3733 |
|
|
% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
|
| 3734 |
|
|
% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
|
| 3735 |
|
|
% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
| 3736 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3737 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3738 |
|
|
%
|
| 3739 |
|
|
\parsearg\domultitable
|
| 3740 |
|
|
}
|
| 3741 |
|
|
\def\domultitable#1{%
|
| 3742 |
|
|
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
| 3743 |
|
|
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
| 3744 |
|
|
%
|
| 3745 |
|
|
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
| 3746 |
|
|
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
| 3747 |
|
|
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
| 3748 |
|
|
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
| 3749 |
|
|
\halign\bgroup &%
|
| 3750 |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
| 3751 |
|
|
\multistrut
|
| 3752 |
|
|
\vtop{%
|
| 3753 |
|
|
% Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
|
| 3754 |
|
|
\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
| 3755 |
|
|
%
|
| 3756 |
|
|
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
| 3757 |
|
|
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
| 3758 |
|
|
% the first one.
|
| 3759 |
|
|
%
|
| 3760 |
|
|
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
| 3761 |
|
|
% to the width of each template entry.
|
| 3762 |
|
|
%
|
| 3763 |
|
|
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
| 3764 |
|
|
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
| 3765 |
|
|
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
| 3766 |
|
|
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
| 3767 |
|
|
%
|
| 3768 |
|
|
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
| 3769 |
|
|
\rightskip=0pt
|
| 3770 |
|
|
\ifnum\colcount=1
|
| 3771 |
|
|
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
| 3772 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
| 3773 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3774 |
|
|
\ifsetpercent \else
|
| 3775 |
|
|
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
| 3776 |
|
|
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
| 3777 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
| 3778 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3779 |
|
|
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
| 3780 |
|
|
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
| 3781 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3782 |
|
|
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
| 3783 |
|
|
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
| 3784 |
|
|
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
| 3785 |
|
|
% For example:
|
| 3786 |
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
| 3787 |
|
|
% @item @code{#}
|
| 3788 |
|
|
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
| 3789 |
|
|
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
|
| 3790 |
|
|
% marking characters.
|
| 3791 |
|
|
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
|
| 3792 |
|
|
}\cr
|
| 3793 |
|
|
}
|
| 3794 |
|
|
\def\Emultitable{%
|
| 3795 |
|
|
\crcr
|
| 3796 |
|
|
\egroup % end the \halign
|
| 3797 |
|
|
\global\setpercentfalse
|
| 3798 |
|
|
}
|
| 3799 |
|
|
|
| 3800 |
|
|
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
|
| 3801 |
|
|
\def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
|
| 3802 |
|
|
%
|
| 3803 |
|
|
% Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
|
| 3804 |
|
|
% \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
|
| 3805 |
|
|
% this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
|
| 3806 |
|
|
% See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
|
| 3807 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
| 3808 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
| 3809 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
| 3810 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3811 |
|
|
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
| 3812 |
|
|
%% table. If not, do nothing.
|
| 3813 |
|
|
%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
| 3814 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
| 3815 |
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
| 3816 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
| 3817 |
|
|
%% than skip between lines in the table.
|
| 3818 |
|
|
\fi%
|
| 3819 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
| 3820 |
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
| 3821 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
| 3822 |
|
|
%% than skip between lines in the table.
|
| 3823 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 3824 |
|
|
|
| 3825 |
|
|
|
| 3826 |
|
|
\message{conditionals,}
|
| 3827 |
|
|
|
| 3828 |
|
|
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
|
| 3829 |
|
|
% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
|
| 3830 |
|
|
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
|
| 3831 |
|
|
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
|
| 3832 |
|
|
% attempt to close an environment group.
|
| 3833 |
|
|
%
|
| 3834 |
|
|
\def\makecond#1{%
|
| 3835 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
|
| 3836 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
|
| 3837 |
|
|
}
|
| 3838 |
|
|
\makecond{iftex}
|
| 3839 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
|
| 3840 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnothtml}
|
| 3841 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
|
| 3842 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
|
| 3843 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnotxml}
|
| 3844 |
|
|
|
| 3845 |
|
|
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
|
| 3846 |
|
|
%
|
| 3847 |
|
|
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
| 3848 |
|
|
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
|
| 3849 |
|
|
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
|
| 3850 |
|
|
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
| 3851 |
|
|
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
|
| 3852 |
|
|
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
| 3853 |
|
|
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
| 3854 |
|
|
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
| 3855 |
|
|
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
|
| 3856 |
|
|
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
|
| 3857 |
|
|
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
| 3858 |
|
|
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
| 3859 |
|
|
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
|
| 3860 |
|
|
|
| 3861 |
|
|
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
|
| 3862 |
|
|
%
|
| 3863 |
|
|
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
|
| 3864 |
|
|
\newcount\doignorecount
|
| 3865 |
|
|
|
| 3866 |
|
|
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
| 3867 |
|
|
% Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
|
| 3868 |
|
|
\obeylines
|
| 3869 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
| 3870 |
|
|
\catcode`\{ = \other
|
| 3871 |
|
|
\catcode`\} = \other
|
| 3872 |
|
|
%
|
| 3873 |
|
|
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
| 3874 |
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
| 3875 |
|
|
%
|
| 3876 |
|
|
% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
|
| 3877 |
|
|
\doignorecount = 0
|
| 3878 |
|
|
%
|
| 3879 |
|
|
% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
|
| 3880 |
|
|
\dodoignore{#1}%
|
| 3881 |
|
|
}
|
| 3882 |
|
|
|
| 3883 |
|
|
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
|
| 3884 |
|
|
\obeylines %
|
| 3885 |
|
|
%
|
| 3886 |
|
|
\gdef\dodoignore#1{%
|
| 3887 |
|
|
% #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
|
| 3888 |
|
|
%
|
| 3889 |
|
|
% Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
|
| 3890 |
|
|
\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
|
| 3891 |
|
|
\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
|
| 3892 |
|
|
%
|
| 3893 |
|
|
% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
|
| 3894 |
|
|
% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
|
| 3895 |
|
|
% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
|
| 3896 |
|
|
\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
|
| 3897 |
|
|
%
|
| 3898 |
|
|
% And now expand that command.
|
| 3899 |
|
|
\doignoretext ^^M%
|
| 3900 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3901 |
|
|
}
|
| 3902 |
|
|
|
| 3903 |
|
|
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
|
| 3904 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 3905 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
|
| 3906 |
|
|
\let\next\doignoretextzzz
|
| 3907 |
|
|
\else % Found a nested condition, ...
|
| 3908 |
|
|
\advance\doignorecount by 1
|
| 3909 |
|
|
\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
|
| 3910 |
|
|
% If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
|
| 3911 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3912 |
|
|
\next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
|
| 3913 |
|
|
}
|
| 3914 |
|
|
|
| 3915 |
|
|
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
|
| 3916 |
|
|
%
|
| 3917 |
|
|
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
|
| 3918 |
|
|
\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
|
| 3919 |
|
|
\let\next\enddoignore
|
| 3920 |
|
|
\else % Still inside a nested condition.
|
| 3921 |
|
|
\advance\doignorecount by -1
|
| 3922 |
|
|
\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
|
| 3923 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3924 |
|
|
\next
|
| 3925 |
|
|
}
|
| 3926 |
|
|
|
| 3927 |
|
|
% Finish off ignored text.
|
| 3928 |
|
|
{ \obeylines%
|
| 3929 |
|
|
% Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
|
| 3930 |
|
|
% environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
|
| 3931 |
|
|
% would result in a blank line in the output.
|
| 3932 |
|
|
\gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
| 3933 |
|
|
}
|
| 3934 |
|
|
|
| 3935 |
|
|
|
| 3936 |
|
|
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
| 3937 |
|
|
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
| 3938 |
|
|
%
|
| 3939 |
|
|
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
| 3940 |
|
|
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
| 3941 |
|
|
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
| 3942 |
|
|
% didn't need it.
|
| 3943 |
|
|
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
|
| 3944 |
|
|
%
|
| 3945 |
|
|
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
| 3946 |
|
|
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
| 3947 |
|
|
{%
|
| 3948 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
| 3949 |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
| 3950 |
|
|
\edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
|
| 3951 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty
|
| 3952 |
|
|
\next{}%
|
| 3953 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3954 |
|
|
\setzzz#2\endsetzzz
|
| 3955 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3956 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3957 |
|
|
}
|
| 3958 |
|
|
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
| 3959 |
|
|
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
|
| 3960 |
|
|
|
| 3961 |
|
|
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
| 3962 |
|
|
%
|
| 3963 |
|
|
\parseargdef\clear{%
|
| 3964 |
|
|
{%
|
| 3965 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
| 3966 |
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
|
| 3967 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3968 |
|
|
}
|
| 3969 |
|
|
|
| 3970 |
|
|
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
| 3971 |
|
|
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
|
| 3972 |
|
|
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
| 3973 |
|
|
{
|
| 3974 |
|
|
\catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
|
| 3975 |
|
|
%
|
| 3976 |
|
|
\gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
|
| 3977 |
|
|
\let\value = \expandablevalue
|
| 3978 |
|
|
% We don't want these characters active, ...
|
| 3979 |
|
|
\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
|
| 3980 |
|
|
% ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
|
| 3981 |
|
|
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
|
| 3982 |
|
|
% So \let them to their normal equivalents.
|
| 3983 |
|
|
\let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
|
| 3984 |
|
|
}
|
| 3985 |
|
|
}
|
| 3986 |
|
|
|
| 3987 |
|
|
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
|
| 3988 |
|
|
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
|
| 3989 |
|
|
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
|
| 3990 |
|
|
% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
|
| 3991 |
|
|
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
|
| 3992 |
|
|
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
|
| 3993 |
|
|
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
|
| 3994 |
|
|
%
|
| 3995 |
|
|
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
| 3996 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
| 3997 |
|
|
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
| 3998 |
|
|
\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
|
| 3999 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4000 |
|
|
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
| 4001 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4002 |
|
|
}
|
| 4003 |
|
|
|
| 4004 |
|
|
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
| 4005 |
|
|
% with @set.
|
| 4006 |
|
|
%
|
| 4007 |
|
|
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
|
| 4008 |
|
|
%
|
| 4009 |
|
|
\makecond{ifset}
|
| 4010 |
|
|
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
|
| 4011 |
|
|
\def\doifset#1#2{%
|
| 4012 |
|
|
{%
|
| 4013 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
| 4014 |
|
|
\let\next=\empty
|
| 4015 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
|
| 4016 |
|
|
#1% If not set, redefine \next.
|
| 4017 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4018 |
|
|
\expandafter
|
| 4019 |
|
|
}\next
|
| 4020 |
|
|
}
|
| 4021 |
|
|
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
|
| 4022 |
|
|
|
| 4023 |
|
|
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
| 4024 |
|
|
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
| 4025 |
|
|
%
|
| 4026 |
|
|
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
|
| 4027 |
|
|
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
|
| 4028 |
|
|
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
|
| 4029 |
|
|
%
|
| 4030 |
|
|
\makecond{ifclear}
|
| 4031 |
|
|
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
|
| 4032 |
|
|
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
|
| 4033 |
|
|
|
| 4034 |
|
|
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
| 4035 |
|
|
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
| 4036 |
|
|
\let\dircategory=\comment
|
| 4037 |
|
|
|
| 4038 |
|
|
% @defininfoenclose.
|
| 4039 |
|
|
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
| 4040 |
|
|
|
| 4041 |
|
|
|
| 4042 |
|
|
\message{indexing,}
|
| 4043 |
|
|
% Index generation facilities
|
| 4044 |
|
|
|
| 4045 |
|
|
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
| 4046 |
|
|
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
|
| 4047 |
|
|
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
|
| 4048 |
|
|
|
| 4049 |
|
|
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
| 4050 |
|
|
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
| 4051 |
|
|
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
| 4052 |
|
|
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
| 4053 |
|
|
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
| 4054 |
|
|
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
| 4055 |
|
|
% for the sake of vms.
|
| 4056 |
|
|
%
|
| 4057 |
|
|
\def\newindex#1{%
|
| 4058 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 4059 |
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
| 4060 |
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
| 4061 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4062 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
| 4063 |
|
|
\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
| 4064 |
|
|
}
|
| 4065 |
|
|
|
| 4066 |
|
|
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
| 4067 |
|
|
%
|
| 4068 |
|
|
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
| 4069 |
|
|
|
| 4070 |
|
|
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
| 4071 |
|
|
%
|
| 4072 |
|
|
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
| 4073 |
|
|
%
|
| 4074 |
|
|
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
| 4075 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 4076 |
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
| 4077 |
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
|
| 4078 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4079 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
| 4080 |
|
|
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
|
| 4081 |
|
|
}
|
| 4082 |
|
|
|
| 4083 |
|
|
|
| 4084 |
|
|
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
| 4085 |
|
|
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
| 4086 |
|
|
%
|
| 4087 |
|
|
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
| 4088 |
|
|
% inside @code.
|
| 4089 |
|
|
%
|
| 4090 |
|
|
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
|
| 4091 |
|
|
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
|
| 4092 |
|
|
|
| 4093 |
|
|
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
|
| 4094 |
|
|
% #3 the target index (bar).
|
| 4095 |
|
|
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
|
| 4096 |
|
|
% Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
|
| 4097 |
|
|
% closing the target index.
|
| 4098 |
|
|
\expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
|
| 4099 |
|
|
% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
|
| 4100 |
|
|
% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
|
| 4101 |
|
|
\expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
| 4102 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
|
| 4103 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4104 |
|
|
% redefine \fooindfile:
|
| 4105 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
|
| 4106 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
|
| 4107 |
|
|
% redefine \fooindex:
|
| 4108 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
|
| 4109 |
|
|
}
|
| 4110 |
|
|
|
| 4111 |
|
|
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
| 4112 |
|
|
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
| 4113 |
|
|
% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
| 4114 |
|
|
|
| 4115 |
|
|
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
| 4116 |
|
|
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
| 4117 |
|
|
|
| 4118 |
|
|
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
| 4119 |
|
|
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
| 4120 |
|
|
|
| 4121 |
|
|
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
| 4122 |
|
|
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
| 4123 |
|
|
|
| 4124 |
|
|
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
| 4125 |
|
|
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
| 4126 |
|
|
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
| 4127 |
|
|
|
| 4128 |
|
|
% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
|
| 4129 |
|
|
% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
|
| 4130 |
|
|
% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
|
| 4131 |
|
|
%
|
| 4132 |
|
|
\def\indexdummies{%
|
| 4133 |
|
|
\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
| 4134 |
|
|
\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
|
| 4135 |
|
|
\def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
|
| 4136 |
|
|
%
|
| 4137 |
|
|
% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
|
| 4138 |
|
|
% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
|
| 4139 |
|
|
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
|
| 4140 |
|
|
\let\{ = \mylbrace
|
| 4141 |
|
|
\let\} = \myrbrace
|
| 4142 |
|
|
%
|
| 4143 |
|
|
% I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
|
| 4144 |
|
|
% generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
|
| 4145 |
|
|
% causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
|
| 4146 |
|
|
% apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
|
| 4147 |
|
|
% is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
|
| 4148 |
|
|
% disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
|
| 4149 |
|
|
% processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
|
| 4150 |
|
|
% seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
|
| 4151 |
|
|
% is still getting written without apparent harm.
|
| 4152 |
|
|
%
|
| 4153 |
|
|
% Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
|
| 4154 |
|
|
% help-texinfo, 22may06):
|
| 4155 |
|
|
% @macro funindex {WORD}
|
| 4156 |
|
|
% @findex xyz
|
| 4157 |
|
|
% @end macro
|
| 4158 |
|
|
% ...
|
| 4159 |
|
|
% @funindex commtest
|
| 4160 |
|
|
%
|
| 4161 |
|
|
% The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
|
| 4162 |
|
|
%
|
| 4163 |
|
|
% Sample whatsit resulting:
|
| 4164 |
|
|
% .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
|
| 4165 |
|
|
%
|
| 4166 |
|
|
% So:
|
| 4167 |
|
|
\let\endinput = \empty
|
| 4168 |
|
|
%
|
| 4169 |
|
|
% Do the redefinitions.
|
| 4170 |
|
|
\commondummies
|
| 4171 |
|
|
}
|
| 4172 |
|
|
|
| 4173 |
|
|
% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
|
| 4174 |
|
|
% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
|
| 4175 |
|
|
% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
|
| 4176 |
|
|
% this will be simpler.
|
| 4177 |
|
|
%
|
| 4178 |
|
|
\def\atdummies{%
|
| 4179 |
|
|
\def\@{@@}%
|
| 4180 |
|
|
\def\ {@ }%
|
| 4181 |
|
|
\let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
|
| 4182 |
|
|
\let\} = \rbraceatcmd
|
| 4183 |
|
|
%
|
| 4184 |
|
|
% Do the redefinitions.
|
| 4185 |
|
|
\commondummies
|
| 4186 |
|
|
\otherbackslash
|
| 4187 |
|
|
}
|
| 4188 |
|
|
|
| 4189 |
|
|
% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
|
| 4190 |
|
|
%
|
| 4191 |
|
|
\def\commondummies{%
|
| 4192 |
|
|
%
|
| 4193 |
|
|
% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
|
| 4194 |
|
|
% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
|
| 4195 |
|
|
% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
|
| 4196 |
|
|
% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
|
| 4197 |
|
|
% from whatever follows.
|
| 4198 |
|
|
%
|
| 4199 |
|
|
% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
|
| 4200 |
|
|
% space.
|
| 4201 |
|
|
%
|
| 4202 |
|
|
% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
|
| 4203 |
|
|
% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
|
| 4204 |
|
|
% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
|
| 4205 |
|
|
%
|
| 4206 |
|
|
\def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
|
| 4207 |
|
|
\def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
|
| 4208 |
|
|
\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
|
| 4209 |
|
|
%
|
| 4210 |
|
|
\commondummiesnofonts
|
| 4211 |
|
|
%
|
| 4212 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\_%
|
| 4213 |
|
|
%
|
| 4214 |
|
|
% Non-English letters.
|
| 4215 |
|
|
\definedummyword\AA
|
| 4216 |
|
|
\definedummyword\AE
|
| 4217 |
|
|
\definedummyword\DH
|
| 4218 |
|
|
\definedummyword\L
|
| 4219 |
|
|
\definedummyword\O
|
| 4220 |
|
|
\definedummyword\OE
|
| 4221 |
|
|
\definedummyword\TH
|
| 4222 |
|
|
\definedummyword\aa
|
| 4223 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ae
|
| 4224 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dh
|
| 4225 |
|
|
\definedummyword\exclamdown
|
| 4226 |
|
|
\definedummyword\l
|
| 4227 |
|
|
\definedummyword\o
|
| 4228 |
|
|
\definedummyword\oe
|
| 4229 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ordf
|
| 4230 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ordm
|
| 4231 |
|
|
\definedummyword\questiondown
|
| 4232 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ss
|
| 4233 |
|
|
\definedummyword\th
|
| 4234 |
|
|
%
|
| 4235 |
|
|
% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
|
| 4236 |
|
|
\definedummyword\bf
|
| 4237 |
|
|
\definedummyword\gtr
|
| 4238 |
|
|
\definedummyword\hat
|
| 4239 |
|
|
\definedummyword\less
|
| 4240 |
|
|
\definedummyword\sf
|
| 4241 |
|
|
\definedummyword\sl
|
| 4242 |
|
|
\definedummyword\tclose
|
| 4243 |
|
|
\definedummyword\tt
|
| 4244 |
|
|
%
|
| 4245 |
|
|
\definedummyword\LaTeX
|
| 4246 |
|
|
\definedummyword\TeX
|
| 4247 |
|
|
%
|
| 4248 |
|
|
% Assorted special characters.
|
| 4249 |
|
|
\definedummyword\bullet
|
| 4250 |
|
|
\definedummyword\comma
|
| 4251 |
|
|
\definedummyword\copyright
|
| 4252 |
|
|
\definedummyword\registeredsymbol
|
| 4253 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dots
|
| 4254 |
|
|
\definedummyword\enddots
|
| 4255 |
|
|
\definedummyword\equiv
|
| 4256 |
|
|
\definedummyword\error
|
| 4257 |
|
|
\definedummyword\euro
|
| 4258 |
|
|
\definedummyword\guillemetleft
|
| 4259 |
|
|
\definedummyword\guillemetright
|
| 4260 |
|
|
\definedummyword\guilsinglleft
|
| 4261 |
|
|
\definedummyword\guilsinglright
|
| 4262 |
|
|
\definedummyword\expansion
|
| 4263 |
|
|
\definedummyword\minus
|
| 4264 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ogonek
|
| 4265 |
|
|
\definedummyword\pounds
|
| 4266 |
|
|
\definedummyword\point
|
| 4267 |
|
|
\definedummyword\print
|
| 4268 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblbase
|
| 4269 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblleft
|
| 4270 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblright
|
| 4271 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quoteleft
|
| 4272 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quoteright
|
| 4273 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quotesinglbase
|
| 4274 |
|
|
\definedummyword\result
|
| 4275 |
|
|
\definedummyword\textdegree
|
| 4276 |
|
|
%
|
| 4277 |
|
|
% We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
|
| 4278 |
|
|
\macrolist
|
| 4279 |
|
|
%
|
| 4280 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
| 4281 |
|
|
%
|
| 4282 |
|
|
% Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
|
| 4283 |
|
|
% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
|
| 4284 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
| 4285 |
|
|
}
|
| 4286 |
|
|
|
| 4287 |
|
|
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
|
| 4288 |
|
|
%
|
| 4289 |
|
|
\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
|
| 4290 |
|
|
% Control letters and accents.
|
| 4291 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\!%
|
| 4292 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\"%
|
| 4293 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\'%
|
| 4294 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\*%
|
| 4295 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\,%
|
| 4296 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\.%
|
| 4297 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\/%
|
| 4298 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\:%
|
| 4299 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\=%
|
| 4300 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\?%
|
| 4301 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\^%
|
| 4302 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\`%
|
| 4303 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\~%
|
| 4304 |
|
|
\definedummyword\u
|
| 4305 |
|
|
\definedummyword\v
|
| 4306 |
|
|
\definedummyword\H
|
| 4307 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dotaccent
|
| 4308 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ogonek
|
| 4309 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ringaccent
|
| 4310 |
|
|
\definedummyword\tieaccent
|
| 4311 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ubaraccent
|
| 4312 |
|
|
\definedummyword\udotaccent
|
| 4313 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dotless
|
| 4314 |
|
|
%
|
| 4315 |
|
|
% Texinfo font commands.
|
| 4316 |
|
|
\definedummyword\b
|
| 4317 |
|
|
\definedummyword\i
|
| 4318 |
|
|
\definedummyword\r
|
| 4319 |
|
|
\definedummyword\sc
|
| 4320 |
|
|
\definedummyword\t
|
| 4321 |
|
|
%
|
| 4322 |
|
|
% Commands that take arguments.
|
| 4323 |
|
|
\definedummyword\acronym
|
| 4324 |
|
|
\definedummyword\cite
|
| 4325 |
|
|
\definedummyword\code
|
| 4326 |
|
|
\definedummyword\command
|
| 4327 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dfn
|
| 4328 |
|
|
\definedummyword\email
|
| 4329 |
|
|
\definedummyword\emph
|
| 4330 |
|
|
\definedummyword\env
|
| 4331 |
|
|
\definedummyword\file
|
| 4332 |
|
|
\definedummyword\kbd
|
| 4333 |
|
|
\definedummyword\key
|
| 4334 |
|
|
\definedummyword\math
|
| 4335 |
|
|
\definedummyword\option
|
| 4336 |
|
|
\definedummyword\pxref
|
| 4337 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ref
|
| 4338 |
|
|
\definedummyword\samp
|
| 4339 |
|
|
\definedummyword\strong
|
| 4340 |
|
|
\definedummyword\tie
|
| 4341 |
|
|
\definedummyword\uref
|
| 4342 |
|
|
\definedummyword\url
|
| 4343 |
|
|
\definedummyword\var
|
| 4344 |
|
|
\definedummyword\verb
|
| 4345 |
|
|
\definedummyword\w
|
| 4346 |
|
|
\definedummyword\xref
|
| 4347 |
|
|
}
|
| 4348 |
|
|
|
| 4349 |
|
|
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
|
| 4350 |
|
|
% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
|
| 4351 |
|
|
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
|
| 4352 |
|
|
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
|
| 4353 |
|
|
%
|
| 4354 |
|
|
\def\indexnofonts{%
|
| 4355 |
|
|
% Accent commands should become @asis.
|
| 4356 |
|
|
\def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
|
| 4357 |
|
|
% We can just ignore other control letters.
|
| 4358 |
|
|
\def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
|
| 4359 |
|
|
% Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
|
| 4360 |
|
|
\let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
|
| 4361 |
|
|
%
|
| 4362 |
|
|
\commondummiesnofonts
|
| 4363 |
|
|
%
|
| 4364 |
|
|
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
| 4365 |
|
|
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
|
| 4366 |
|
|
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
|
| 4367 |
|
|
%\let\tt=\asis
|
| 4368 |
|
|
%
|
| 4369 |
|
|
\def\ { }%
|
| 4370 |
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
| 4371 |
|
|
% how to handle braces?
|
| 4372 |
|
|
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
|
| 4373 |
|
|
%
|
| 4374 |
|
|
% Non-English letters.
|
| 4375 |
|
|
\def\AA{AA}%
|
| 4376 |
|
|
\def\AE{AE}%
|
| 4377 |
|
|
\def\DH{DZZ}%
|
| 4378 |
|
|
\def\L{L}%
|
| 4379 |
|
|
\def\OE{OE}%
|
| 4380 |
|
|
\def\O{O}%
|
| 4381 |
|
|
\def\TH{ZZZ}%
|
| 4382 |
|
|
\def\aa{aa}%
|
| 4383 |
|
|
\def\ae{ae}%
|
| 4384 |
|
|
\def\dh{dzz}%
|
| 4385 |
|
|
\def\exclamdown{!}%
|
| 4386 |
|
|
\def\l{l}%
|
| 4387 |
|
|
\def\oe{oe}%
|
| 4388 |
|
|
\def\ordf{a}%
|
| 4389 |
|
|
\def\ordm{o}%
|
| 4390 |
|
|
\def\o{o}%
|
| 4391 |
|
|
\def\questiondown{?}%
|
| 4392 |
|
|
\def\ss{ss}%
|
| 4393 |
|
|
\def\th{zzz}%
|
| 4394 |
|
|
%
|
| 4395 |
|
|
\def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
|
| 4396 |
|
|
\def\TeX{TeX}%
|
| 4397 |
|
|
%
|
| 4398 |
|
|
% Assorted special characters.
|
| 4399 |
|
|
% (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
|
| 4400 |
|
|
\def\bullet{bullet}%
|
| 4401 |
|
|
\def\comma{,}%
|
| 4402 |
|
|
\def\copyright{copyright}%
|
| 4403 |
|
|
\def\dots{...}%
|
| 4404 |
|
|
\def\enddots{...}%
|
| 4405 |
|
|
\def\equiv{==}%
|
| 4406 |
|
|
\def\error{error}%
|
| 4407 |
|
|
\def\euro{euro}%
|
| 4408 |
|
|
\def\expansion{==>}%
|
| 4409 |
|
|
\def\guillemetleft{<<}%
|
| 4410 |
|
|
\def\guillemetright{>>}%
|
| 4411 |
|
|
\def\guilsinglleft{<}%
|
| 4412 |
|
|
\def\guilsinglright{>}%
|
| 4413 |
|
|
\def\minus{-}%
|
| 4414 |
|
|
\def\point{.}%
|
| 4415 |
|
|
\def\pounds{pounds}%
|
| 4416 |
|
|
\def\print{-|}%
|
| 4417 |
|
|
\def\quotedblbase{"}%
|
| 4418 |
|
|
\def\quotedblleft{"}%
|
| 4419 |
|
|
\def\quotedblright{"}%
|
| 4420 |
|
|
\def\quoteleft{`}%
|
| 4421 |
|
|
\def\quoteright{'}%
|
| 4422 |
|
|
\def\quotesinglbase{,}%
|
| 4423 |
|
|
\def\registeredsymbol{R}%
|
| 4424 |
|
|
\def\result{=>}%
|
| 4425 |
|
|
\def\textdegree{o}%
|
| 4426 |
|
|
%
|
| 4427 |
|
|
% We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
|
| 4428 |
|
|
% Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
|
| 4429 |
|
|
% makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
|
| 4430 |
|
|
% writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
|
| 4431 |
|
|
% that starts with \.
|
| 4432 |
|
|
%
|
| 4433 |
|
|
% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
|
| 4434 |
|
|
% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
|
| 4435 |
|
|
% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
|
| 4436 |
|
|
%
|
| 4437 |
|
|
\macrolist
|
| 4438 |
|
|
}
|
| 4439 |
|
|
|
| 4440 |
|
|
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
| 4441 |
|
|
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
|
| 4442 |
|
|
|
| 4443 |
|
|
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
|
| 4444 |
|
|
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
|
| 4445 |
|
|
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
|
| 4446 |
|
|
|
| 4447 |
|
|
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
|
| 4448 |
|
|
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
|
| 4449 |
|
|
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
|
| 4450 |
|
|
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
|
| 4451 |
|
|
%
|
| 4452 |
|
|
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
| 4453 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 4454 |
|
|
{%
|
| 4455 |
|
|
% Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
|
| 4456 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#2}%
|
| 4457 |
|
|
% If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
|
| 4458 |
|
|
\def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
| 4459 |
|
|
\ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
|
| 4460 |
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
|
| 4461 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4462 |
|
|
%
|
| 4463 |
|
|
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
| 4464 |
|
|
%
|
| 4465 |
|
|
\safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
|
| 4466 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4467 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4468 |
|
|
}
|
| 4469 |
|
|
|
| 4470 |
|
|
% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
|
| 4471 |
|
|
%
|
| 4472 |
|
|
\def\dosubindwrite{%
|
| 4473 |
|
|
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
| 4474 |
|
|
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
| 4475 |
|
|
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
|
| 4476 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4477 |
|
|
%
|
| 4478 |
|
|
% Remember, we are within a group.
|
| 4479 |
|
|
\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
| 4480 |
|
|
\def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
| 4481 |
|
|
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
| 4482 |
|
|
%
|
| 4483 |
|
|
% Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
|
| 4484 |
|
|
% get the string to sort by.
|
| 4485 |
|
|
{\indexnofonts
|
| 4486 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
|
| 4487 |
|
|
\xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
|
| 4488 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4489 |
|
|
%
|
| 4490 |
|
|
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
|
| 4491 |
|
|
% the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
| 4492 |
|
|
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
|
| 4493 |
|
|
% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
|
| 4494 |
|
|
% sorted result.
|
| 4495 |
|
|
\edef\temp{%
|
| 4496 |
|
|
\write\writeto{%
|
| 4497 |
|
|
\string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
| 4498 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4499 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 4500 |
|
|
}
|
| 4501 |
|
|
|
| 4502 |
|
|
% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
|
| 4503 |
|
|
%
|
| 4504 |
|
|
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
| 4505 |
|
|
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
| 4506 |
|
|
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
| 4507 |
|
|
% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
|
| 4508 |
|
|
% sequences like this:
|
| 4509 |
|
|
% @end defun
|
| 4510 |
|
|
% @tindex whatever
|
| 4511 |
|
|
% @defun ...
|
| 4512 |
|
|
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
| 4513 |
|
|
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
| 4514 |
|
|
% the previous defun.
|
| 4515 |
|
|
%
|
| 4516 |
|
|
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
| 4517 |
|
|
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
| 4518 |
|
|
%
|
| 4519 |
|
|
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
| 4520 |
|
|
%
|
| 4521 |
|
|
% But wait, there is a catch there:
|
| 4522 |
|
|
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
|
| 4523 |
|
|
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
|
| 4524 |
|
|
% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
|
| 4525 |
|
|
% representation of the skip.
|
| 4526 |
|
|
%
|
| 4527 |
|
|
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
|
| 4528 |
|
|
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
|
| 4529 |
|
|
%
|
| 4530 |
|
|
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
|
| 4531 |
|
|
%
|
| 4532 |
|
|
\newskip\whatsitskip
|
| 4533 |
|
|
\newcount\whatsitpenalty
|
| 4534 |
|
|
%
|
| 4535 |
|
|
% ..., ready, GO:
|
| 4536 |
|
|
%
|
| 4537 |
|
|
\def\safewhatsit#1{%
|
| 4538 |
|
|
\ifhmode
|
| 4539 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 4540 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4541 |
|
|
% \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
|
| 4542 |
|
|
\whatsitskip = \lastskip
|
| 4543 |
|
|
\edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
|
| 4544 |
|
|
\whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
|
| 4545 |
|
|
%
|
| 4546 |
|
|
% If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
|
| 4547 |
|
|
% skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
|
| 4548 |
|
|
% -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
|
| 4549 |
|
|
% non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
|
| 4550 |
|
|
% breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
|
| 4551 |
|
|
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
| 4552 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4553 |
|
|
\vskip-\whatsitskip
|
| 4554 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4555 |
|
|
%
|
| 4556 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 4557 |
|
|
%
|
| 4558 |
|
|
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
| 4559 |
|
|
% If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
|
| 4560 |
|
|
% perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
|
| 4561 |
|
|
% to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
|
| 4562 |
|
|
% signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
|
| 4563 |
|
|
% following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
|
| 4564 |
|
|
%
|
| 4565 |
|
|
% @deffn deffn-whatever
|
| 4566 |
|
|
% @vindex index-whatever
|
| 4567 |
|
|
% Description.
|
| 4568 |
|
|
% would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
|
| 4569 |
|
|
% and the "Description." paragraph.
|
| 4570 |
|
|
\ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
|
| 4571 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4572 |
|
|
% On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
|
| 4573 |
|
|
% this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
|
| 4574 |
|
|
% (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
|
| 4575 |
|
|
\nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
|
| 4576 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4577 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4578 |
|
|
}
|
| 4579 |
|
|
|
| 4580 |
|
|
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
| 4581 |
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
| 4582 |
|
|
% or
|
| 4583 |
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
| 4584 |
|
|
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
| 4585 |
|
|
% containing these kinds of lines:
|
| 4586 |
|
|
% \initial {c}
|
| 4587 |
|
|
% before the first topic whose initial is c
|
| 4588 |
|
|
% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
| 4589 |
|
|
% for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
| 4590 |
|
|
% \primary {topic}
|
| 4591 |
|
|
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
| 4592 |
|
|
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
| 4593 |
|
|
% for each subtopic.
|
| 4594 |
|
|
|
| 4595 |
|
|
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
| 4596 |
|
|
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
| 4597 |
|
|
|
| 4598 |
|
|
\def\findex {\fnindex}
|
| 4599 |
|
|
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
| 4600 |
|
|
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
| 4601 |
|
|
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
| 4602 |
|
|
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
| 4603 |
|
|
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
| 4604 |
|
|
|
| 4605 |
|
|
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
| 4606 |
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
| 4607 |
|
|
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
| 4608 |
|
|
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
| 4609 |
|
|
|
| 4610 |
|
|
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
| 4611 |
|
|
|
| 4612 |
|
|
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
| 4613 |
|
|
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
| 4614 |
|
|
%
|
| 4615 |
|
|
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
|
| 4616 |
|
|
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
| 4617 |
|
|
%
|
| 4618 |
|
|
\smallfonts \rm
|
| 4619 |
|
|
\tolerance = 9500
|
| 4620 |
|
|
\plainfrenchspacing
|
| 4621 |
|
|
\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
|
| 4622 |
|
|
%
|
| 4623 |
|
|
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
| 4624 |
|
|
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
| 4625 |
|
|
% \initial {@}
|
| 4626 |
|
|
% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
| 4627 |
|
|
% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
| 4628 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = 11
|
| 4629 |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
| 4630 |
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
| 4631 |
|
|
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
| 4632 |
|
|
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
| 4633 |
|
|
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
| 4634 |
|
|
% there is some text.
|
| 4635 |
|
|
\putwordIndexNonexistent
|
| 4636 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4637 |
|
|
%
|
| 4638 |
|
|
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
| 4639 |
|
|
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
| 4640 |
|
|
% it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
| 4641 |
|
|
\read 1 to \temp
|
| 4642 |
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
| 4643 |
|
|
\putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
| 4644 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4645 |
|
|
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
| 4646 |
|
|
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
| 4647 |
|
|
% to make right now.
|
| 4648 |
|
|
\def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
|
| 4649 |
|
|
\catcode`\\ = 0
|
| 4650 |
|
|
\escapechar = `\\
|
| 4651 |
|
|
\begindoublecolumns
|
| 4652 |
|
|
\input \jobname.#1s
|
| 4653 |
|
|
\enddoublecolumns
|
| 4654 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4655 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4656 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 4657 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 4658 |
|
|
|
| 4659 |
|
|
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
| 4660 |
|
|
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
| 4661 |
|
|
|
| 4662 |
|
|
\def\initial#1{{%
|
| 4663 |
|
|
% Some minor font changes for the special characters.
|
| 4664 |
|
|
\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
| 4665 |
|
|
%
|
| 4666 |
|
|
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
| 4667 |
|
|
\removelastskip
|
| 4668 |
|
|
%
|
| 4669 |
|
|
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
| 4670 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 4671 |
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
|
| 4672 |
|
|
\penalty 0
|
| 4673 |
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
|
| 4674 |
|
|
%
|
| 4675 |
|
|
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
| 4676 |
|
|
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
| 4677 |
|
|
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
| 4678 |
|
|
% we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
| 4679 |
|
|
%
|
| 4680 |
|
|
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
| 4681 |
|
|
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
|
| 4682 |
|
|
\leftline{\secbf #1}%
|
| 4683 |
|
|
% Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
| 4684 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 4685 |
|
|
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
| 4686 |
|
|
}}
|
| 4687 |
|
|
|
| 4688 |
|
|
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
|
| 4689 |
|
|
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
|
| 4690 |
|
|
% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
| 4691 |
|
|
%
|
| 4692 |
|
|
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
|
| 4693 |
|
|
% \def\entry#1#2{...
|
| 4694 |
|
|
% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
|
| 4695 |
|
|
% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
|
| 4696 |
|
|
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
|
| 4697 |
|
|
%
|
| 4698 |
|
|
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
|
| 4699 |
|
|
% --kasal, 21nov03
|
| 4700 |
|
|
\def\entry{%
|
| 4701 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4702 |
|
|
%
|
| 4703 |
|
|
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
| 4704 |
|
|
% affect previous text.
|
| 4705 |
|
|
\par
|
| 4706 |
|
|
%
|
| 4707 |
|
|
% Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
| 4708 |
|
|
\parfillskip = 0in
|
| 4709 |
|
|
%
|
| 4710 |
|
|
% No extra space above this paragraph.
|
| 4711 |
|
|
\parskip = 0in
|
| 4712 |
|
|
%
|
| 4713 |
|
|
% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
| 4714 |
|
|
\finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
| 4715 |
|
|
%
|
| 4716 |
|
|
% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
| 4717 |
|
|
% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
| 4718 |
|
|
% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
| 4719 |
|
|
% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
| 4720 |
|
|
% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
| 4721 |
|
|
%
|
| 4722 |
|
|
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
| 4723 |
|
|
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
| 4724 |
|
|
\hangindent = 2em
|
| 4725 |
|
|
%
|
| 4726 |
|
|
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
| 4727 |
|
|
% with blank space.
|
| 4728 |
|
|
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
| 4729 |
|
|
%
|
| 4730 |
|
|
% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
|
| 4731 |
|
|
% columns.
|
| 4732 |
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus1pt
|
| 4733 |
|
|
%
|
| 4734 |
|
|
% Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
|
| 4735 |
|
|
\afterassignment\doentry
|
| 4736 |
|
|
\let\temp =
|
| 4737 |
|
|
}
|
| 4738 |
|
|
\def\doentry{%
|
| 4739 |
|
|
\bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
|
| 4740 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 4741 |
|
|
\aftergroup\finishentry
|
| 4742 |
|
|
% And now comes the text of the entry.
|
| 4743 |
|
|
}
|
| 4744 |
|
|
\def\finishentry#1{%
|
| 4745 |
|
|
% #1 is the page number.
|
| 4746 |
|
|
%
|
| 4747 |
|
|
% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
| 4748 |
|
|
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
| 4749 |
|
|
% cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
| 4750 |
|
|
\setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
|
| 4751 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
|
| 4752 |
|
|
\ %
|
| 4753 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4754 |
|
|
%
|
| 4755 |
|
|
% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
| 4756 |
|
|
% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
| 4757 |
|
|
% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
| 4758 |
|
|
\hfil\penalty50
|
| 4759 |
|
|
\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
| 4760 |
|
|
%
|
| 4761 |
|
|
% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
| 4762 |
|
|
% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
| 4763 |
|
|
% \hbox ensues.
|
| 4764 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 4765 |
|
|
\pdfgettoks#1.%
|
| 4766 |
|
|
\ \the\toksA
|
| 4767 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4768 |
|
|
\ #1%
|
| 4769 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4770 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4771 |
|
|
\par
|
| 4772 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4773 |
|
|
}
|
| 4774 |
|
|
|
| 4775 |
|
|
% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
|
| 4776 |
|
|
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
| 4777 |
|
|
\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
| 4778 |
|
|
|
| 4779 |
|
|
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
| 4780 |
|
|
|
| 4781 |
|
|
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
| 4782 |
|
|
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
|
| 4783 |
|
|
\parfillskip=0in
|
| 4784 |
|
|
\parskip=0in
|
| 4785 |
|
|
\hangindent=1in
|
| 4786 |
|
|
\hangafter=1
|
| 4787 |
|
|
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
|
| 4788 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 4789 |
|
|
\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
|
| 4790 |
|
|
\else
|
| 4791 |
|
|
#2
|
| 4792 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4793 |
|
|
\par
|
| 4794 |
|
|
}}
|
| 4795 |
|
|
|
| 4796 |
|
|
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
| 4797 |
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
| 4798 |
|
|
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
| 4799 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=11
|
| 4800 |
|
|
|
| 4801 |
|
|
\newbox\partialpage
|
| 4802 |
|
|
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
| 4803 |
|
|
|
| 4804 |
|
|
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
| 4805 |
|
|
% Grab any single-column material above us.
|
| 4806 |
|
|
\output = {%
|
| 4807 |
|
|
%
|
| 4808 |
|
|
% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
| 4809 |
|
|
% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
| 4810 |
|
|
% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
| 4811 |
|
|
% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
| 4812 |
|
|
% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
|
| 4813 |
|
|
% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
|
| 4814 |
|
|
% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
|
| 4815 |
|
|
\ifvoid\partialpage \else
|
| 4816 |
|
|
\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
|
| 4817 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4818 |
|
|
%
|
| 4819 |
|
|
\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
| 4820 |
|
|
% Unvbox the main output page.
|
| 4821 |
|
|
\unvbox\PAGE
|
| 4822 |
|
|
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
| 4823 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4824 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4825 |
|
|
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
|
| 4826 |
|
|
%
|
| 4827 |
|
|
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
| 4828 |
|
|
\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
| 4829 |
|
|
%
|
| 4830 |
|
|
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
| 4831 |
|
|
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
| 4832 |
|
|
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
| 4833 |
|
|
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
| 4834 |
|
|
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
| 4835 |
|
|
%
|
| 4836 |
|
|
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
| 4837 |
|
|
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
| 4838 |
|
|
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
| 4839 |
|
|
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
| 4840 |
|
|
% as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
| 4841 |
|
|
%
|
| 4842 |
|
|
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
| 4843 |
|
|
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
| 4844 |
|
|
% been clobbered.
|
| 4845 |
|
|
%
|
| 4846 |
|
|
\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
| 4847 |
|
|
\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
| 4848 |
|
|
\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
| 4849 |
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
| 4850 |
|
|
%
|
| 4851 |
|
|
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
| 4852 |
|
|
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
| 4853 |
|
|
\vsize = 2\vsize
|
| 4854 |
|
|
}
|
| 4855 |
|
|
|
| 4856 |
|
|
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
| 4857 |
|
|
% the last.
|
| 4858 |
|
|
%
|
| 4859 |
|
|
\def\doublecolumnout{%
|
| 4860 |
|
|
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
| 4861 |
|
|
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
| 4862 |
|
|
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
| 4863 |
|
|
% previous page.
|
| 4864 |
|
|
\dimen@ = \vsize
|
| 4865 |
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2
|
| 4866 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
|
| 4867 |
|
|
%
|
| 4868 |
|
|
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
| 4869 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
| 4870 |
|
|
\onepageout\pagesofar
|
| 4871 |
|
|
\unvbox255
|
| 4872 |
|
|
\penalty\outputpenalty
|
| 4873 |
|
|
}
|
| 4874 |
|
|
%
|
| 4875 |
|
|
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
| 4876 |
|
|
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
| 4877 |
|
|
\def\pagesofar{%
|
| 4878 |
|
|
\unvbox\partialpage
|
| 4879 |
|
|
%
|
| 4880 |
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
| 4881 |
|
|
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
| 4882 |
|
|
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
| 4883 |
|
|
}
|
| 4884 |
|
|
%
|
| 4885 |
|
|
% All done with double columns.
|
| 4886 |
|
|
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
| 4887 |
|
|
% The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
|
| 4888 |
|
|
% _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
|
| 4889 |
|
|
% following situation:
|
| 4890 |
|
|
%
|
| 4891 |
|
|
% The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
|
| 4892 |
|
|
% Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
|
| 4893 |
|
|
% break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
|
| 4894 |
|
|
% section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
|
| 4895 |
|
|
% fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
|
| 4896 |
|
|
% penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
|
| 4897 |
|
|
% below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
|
| 4898 |
|
|
% routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
|
| 4899 |
|
|
% double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
|
| 4900 |
|
|
% is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
|
| 4901 |
|
|
% the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
|
| 4902 |
|
|
% the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
|
| 4903 |
|
|
% break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
|
| 4904 |
|
|
% page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
|
| 4905 |
|
|
% goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
|
| 4906 |
|
|
% section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
|
| 4907 |
|
|
% \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
|
| 4908 |
|
|
% and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
|
| 4909 |
|
|
% \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
|
| 4910 |
|
|
%
|
| 4911 |
|
|
% Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
|
| 4912 |
|
|
% page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
|
| 4913 |
|
|
\penalty0
|
| 4914 |
|
|
%
|
| 4915 |
|
|
\output = {%
|
| 4916 |
|
|
% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
|
| 4917 |
|
|
% current page, no automatic page break.
|
| 4918 |
|
|
\balancecolumns
|
| 4919 |
|
|
%
|
| 4920 |
|
|
% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
|
| 4921 |
|
|
% though, there will be another page break right after this \output
|
| 4922 |
|
|
% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
| 4923 |
|
|
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
| 4924 |
|
|
% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
|
| 4925 |
|
|
% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
|
| 4926 |
|
|
% the output somewhat more palatable.)
|
| 4927 |
|
|
\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
|
| 4928 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4929 |
|
|
\eject
|
| 4930 |
|
|
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
| 4931 |
|
|
%
|
| 4932 |
|
|
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
| 4933 |
|
|
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
| 4934 |
|
|
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
|
| 4935 |
|
|
% \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
|
| 4936 |
|
|
\pagegoal = \vsize
|
| 4937 |
|
|
}
|
| 4938 |
|
|
%
|
| 4939 |
|
|
% Called at the end of the double column material.
|
| 4940 |
|
|
\def\balancecolumns{%
|
| 4941 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
| 4942 |
|
|
\dimen@ = \ht0
|
| 4943 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
| 4944 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
| 4945 |
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
| 4946 |
|
|
%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
|
| 4947 |
|
|
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
| 4948 |
|
|
% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
| 4949 |
|
|
{%
|
| 4950 |
|
|
\vbadness = 10000
|
| 4951 |
|
|
\loop
|
| 4952 |
|
|
\global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
| 4953 |
|
|
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
| 4954 |
|
|
\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
|
| 4955 |
|
|
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
| 4956 |
|
|
\repeat
|
| 4957 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4958 |
|
|
%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
|
| 4959 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
| 4960 |
|
|
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
| 4961 |
|
|
%
|
| 4962 |
|
|
\pagesofar
|
| 4963 |
|
|
}
|
| 4964 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
| 4965 |
|
|
|
| 4966 |
|
|
|
| 4967 |
|
|
\message{sectioning,}
|
| 4968 |
|
|
% Chapters, sections, etc.
|
| 4969 |
|
|
|
| 4970 |
|
|
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
|
| 4971 |
|
|
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
|
| 4972 |
|
|
% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
|
| 4973 |
|
|
% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
|
| 4974 |
|
|
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
|
| 4975 |
|
|
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
|
| 4976 |
|
|
\newcount\chapno
|
| 4977 |
|
|
\newcount\secno \secno=0
|
| 4978 |
|
|
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
| 4979 |
|
|
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
| 4980 |
|
|
|
| 4981 |
|
|
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
| 4982 |
|
|
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
| 4983 |
|
|
%
|
| 4984 |
|
|
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
| 4985 |
|
|
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
|
| 4986 |
|
|
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
|
| 4987 |
|
|
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
|
| 4988 |
|
|
%
|
| 4989 |
|
|
\def\appendixletter{%
|
| 4990 |
|
|
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
|
| 4991 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
|
| 4992 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
|
| 4993 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
|
| 4994 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
|
| 4995 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
|
| 4996 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
|
| 4997 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
|
| 4998 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
|
| 4999 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
|
| 5000 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
|
| 5001 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
|
| 5002 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
|
| 5003 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
|
| 5004 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
|
| 5005 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
|
| 5006 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
|
| 5007 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
|
| 5008 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
|
| 5009 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
|
| 5010 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
|
| 5011 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
|
| 5012 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
|
| 5013 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
|
| 5014 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
|
| 5015 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
|
| 5016 |
|
|
% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
|
| 5017 |
|
|
% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
|
| 5018 |
|
|
% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
|
| 5019 |
|
|
% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
|
| 5020 |
|
|
\else\char\the\appendixno
|
| 5021 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
| 5022 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
| 5023 |
|
|
|
| 5024 |
|
|
% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
|
| 5025 |
|
|
% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
|
| 5026 |
|
|
% these. @section does likewise.
|
| 5027 |
|
|
\def\thischapter{}
|
| 5028 |
|
|
\def\thischapternum{}
|
| 5029 |
|
|
\def\thischaptername{}
|
| 5030 |
|
|
\def\thissection{}
|
| 5031 |
|
|
\def\thissectionnum{}
|
| 5032 |
|
|
\def\thissectionname{}
|
| 5033 |
|
|
|
| 5034 |
|
|
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
| 5035 |
|
|
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
|
| 5036 |
|
|
|
| 5037 |
|
|
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
| 5038 |
|
|
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
| 5039 |
|
|
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
|
| 5040 |
|
|
|
| 5041 |
|
|
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
| 5042 |
|
|
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
| 5043 |
|
|
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
|
| 5044 |
|
|
|
| 5045 |
|
|
% we only have subsub.
|
| 5046 |
|
|
\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
|
| 5047 |
|
|
%
|
| 5048 |
|
|
% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
|
| 5049 |
|
|
% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
|
| 5050 |
|
|
\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
|
| 5051 |
|
|
%
|
| 5052 |
|
|
% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
|
| 5053 |
|
|
% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
|
| 5054 |
|
|
\def\chapheadtype{N}
|
| 5055 |
|
|
|
| 5056 |
|
|
% Choose a heading macro
|
| 5057 |
|
|
% #1 is heading type
|
| 5058 |
|
|
% #2 is heading level
|
| 5059 |
|
|
% #3 is text for heading
|
| 5060 |
|
|
\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
|
| 5061 |
|
|
% Compute the abs. sec. level:
|
| 5062 |
|
|
\absseclevel=#2
|
| 5063 |
|
|
\advance\absseclevel by \secbase
|
| 5064 |
|
|
% Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
|
| 5065 |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel < 0
|
| 5066 |
|
|
\absseclevel = 0
|
| 5067 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5068 |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel > 3
|
| 5069 |
|
|
\absseclevel = 3
|
| 5070 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5071 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5072 |
|
|
% The heading type:
|
| 5073 |
|
|
\def\headtype{#1}%
|
| 5074 |
|
|
\if \headtype U%
|
| 5075 |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
|
| 5076 |
|
|
\chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
|
| 5077 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5078 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5079 |
|
|
% Check for appendix sections:
|
| 5080 |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel = 0
|
| 5081 |
|
|
\edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
|
| 5082 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5083 |
|
|
\if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
|
| 5084 |
|
|
\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
|
| 5085 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
| 5086 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5087 |
|
|
% Check for numbered within unnumbered:
|
| 5088 |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
|
| 5089 |
|
|
\def\headtype{U}%
|
| 5090 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5091 |
|
|
\chardef\unmlevel = 3
|
| 5092 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5093 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5094 |
|
|
% Now print the heading:
|
| 5095 |
|
|
\if \headtype U%
|
| 5096 |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
| 5097 |
|
|
\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
|
| 5098 |
|
|
\or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
|
| 5099 |
|
|
\or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| 5100 |
|
|
\or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| 5101 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5102 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5103 |
|
|
\if \headtype A%
|
| 5104 |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
| 5105 |
|
|
\appendixzzz{#3}%
|
| 5106 |
|
|
\or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
|
| 5107 |
|
|
\or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| 5108 |
|
|
\or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| 5109 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5110 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5111 |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
| 5112 |
|
|
\chapterzzz{#3}%
|
| 5113 |
|
|
\or \seczzz{#3}%
|
| 5114 |
|
|
\or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| 5115 |
|
|
\or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| 5116 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5117 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5118 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5119 |
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
| 5120 |
|
|
}
|
| 5121 |
|
|
|
| 5122 |
|
|
% an interface:
|
| 5123 |
|
|
\def\numhead{\genhead N}
|
| 5124 |
|
|
\def\apphead{\genhead A}
|
| 5125 |
|
|
\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
|
| 5126 |
|
|
|
| 5127 |
|
|
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
|
| 5128 |
|
|
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
|
| 5129 |
|
|
%
|
| 5130 |
|
|
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
|
| 5131 |
|
|
% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
|
| 5132 |
|
|
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
| 5133 |
|
|
%
|
| 5134 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
| 5135 |
|
|
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
|
| 5136 |
|
|
% section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
|
| 5137 |
|
|
% as an @include file.
|
| 5138 |
|
|
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
| 5139 |
|
|
\global\advance\chapno by 1
|
| 5140 |
|
|
%
|
| 5141 |
|
|
% Used for \float.
|
| 5142 |
|
|
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
|
| 5143 |
|
|
\resetallfloatnos
|
| 5144 |
|
|
%
|
| 5145 |
|
|
% \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
|
| 5146 |
|
|
\toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
|
| 5147 |
|
|
\message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
|
| 5148 |
|
|
%
|
| 5149 |
|
|
% Write the actual heading.
|
| 5150 |
|
|
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
|
| 5151 |
|
|
%
|
| 5152 |
|
|
% So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
|
| 5153 |
|
|
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
| 5154 |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
| 5155 |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
| 5156 |
|
|
}
|
| 5157 |
|
|
|
| 5158 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
|
| 5159 |
|
|
%
|
| 5160 |
|
|
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
|
| 5161 |
|
|
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
| 5162 |
|
|
\global\advance\appendixno by 1
|
| 5163 |
|
|
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
|
| 5164 |
|
|
\resetallfloatnos
|
| 5165 |
|
|
%
|
| 5166 |
|
|
% \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
|
| 5167 |
|
|
\toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
|
| 5168 |
|
|
\message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
|
| 5169 |
|
|
%
|
| 5170 |
|
|
\chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
|
| 5171 |
|
|
%
|
| 5172 |
|
|
\global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
| 5173 |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
| 5174 |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
| 5175 |
|
|
}
|
| 5176 |
|
|
|
| 5177 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
|
| 5178 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
|
| 5179 |
|
|
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
| 5180 |
|
|
\global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
|
| 5181 |
|
|
%
|
| 5182 |
|
|
% Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
|
| 5183 |
|
|
\global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
| 5184 |
|
|
\resetallfloatnos
|
| 5185 |
|
|
%
|
| 5186 |
|
|
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
| 5187 |
|
|
% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
| 5188 |
|
|
% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
| 5189 |
|
|
% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
| 5190 |
|
|
% to be executed, not expanded).
|
| 5191 |
|
|
%
|
| 5192 |
|
|
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
| 5193 |
|
|
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
| 5194 |
|
|
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
| 5195 |
|
|
% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
|
| 5196 |
|
|
% the toc entries.)
|
| 5197 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 5198 |
|
|
\message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
| 5199 |
|
|
%
|
| 5200 |
|
|
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
|
| 5201 |
|
|
%
|
| 5202 |
|
|
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
| 5203 |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
| 5204 |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
| 5205 |
|
|
}
|
| 5206 |
|
|
|
| 5207 |
|
|
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
| 5208 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
|
| 5209 |
|
|
% Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
|
| 5210 |
|
|
% an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
|
| 5211 |
|
|
% Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
|
| 5212 |
|
|
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
|
| 5213 |
|
|
\unnmhead0{#1}%
|
| 5214 |
|
|
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
| 5215 |
|
|
}
|
| 5216 |
|
|
|
| 5217 |
|
|
% @top is like @unnumbered.
|
| 5218 |
|
|
\let\top\unnumbered
|
| 5219 |
|
|
|
| 5220 |
|
|
% Sections.
|
| 5221 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
| 5222 |
|
|
\def\seczzz#1{%
|
| 5223 |
|
|
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
| 5224 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
|
| 5225 |
|
|
}
|
| 5226 |
|
|
|
| 5227 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
|
| 5228 |
|
|
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
|
| 5229 |
|
|
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
| 5230 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
|
| 5231 |
|
|
}
|
| 5232 |
|
|
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
|
| 5233 |
|
|
|
| 5234 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
|
| 5235 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
|
| 5236 |
|
|
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
| 5237 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
|
| 5238 |
|
|
}
|
| 5239 |
|
|
|
| 5240 |
|
|
% Subsections.
|
| 5241 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
|
| 5242 |
|
|
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
| 5243 |
|
|
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
| 5244 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
| 5245 |
|
|
}
|
| 5246 |
|
|
|
| 5247 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
|
| 5248 |
|
|
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
|
| 5249 |
|
|
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
| 5250 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
|
| 5251 |
|
|
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
| 5252 |
|
|
}
|
| 5253 |
|
|
|
| 5254 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
|
| 5255 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
| 5256 |
|
|
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
| 5257 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
|
| 5258 |
|
|
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
| 5259 |
|
|
}
|
| 5260 |
|
|
|
| 5261 |
|
|
% Subsubsections.
|
| 5262 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
|
| 5263 |
|
|
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
| 5264 |
|
|
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
| 5265 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
|
| 5266 |
|
|
{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
| 5267 |
|
|
}
|
| 5268 |
|
|
|
| 5269 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
|
| 5270 |
|
|
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
| 5271 |
|
|
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
| 5272 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
|
| 5273 |
|
|
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
| 5274 |
|
|
}
|
| 5275 |
|
|
|
| 5276 |
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
|
| 5277 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
| 5278 |
|
|
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
| 5279 |
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
|
| 5280 |
|
|
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
| 5281 |
|
|
}
|
| 5282 |
|
|
|
| 5283 |
|
|
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
| 5284 |
|
|
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
| 5285 |
|
|
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
| 5286 |
|
|
\let\section = \numberedsec
|
| 5287 |
|
|
\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
| 5288 |
|
|
\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
| 5289 |
|
|
|
| 5290 |
|
|
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
| 5291 |
|
|
|
| 5292 |
|
|
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
|
| 5293 |
|
|
% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
|
| 5294 |
|
|
% overlong headings to fold.
|
| 5295 |
|
|
% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
|
| 5296 |
|
|
% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
|
| 5297 |
|
|
% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
|
| 5298 |
|
|
% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
|
| 5299 |
|
|
|
| 5300 |
|
|
\def\majorheading{%
|
| 5301 |
|
|
{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
| 5302 |
|
|
\parsearg\chapheadingzzz
|
| 5303 |
|
|
}
|
| 5304 |
|
|
|
| 5305 |
|
|
\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
| 5306 |
|
|
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
|
| 5307 |
|
|
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| 5308 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
|
| 5309 |
|
|
\rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
|
| 5310 |
|
|
\bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
|
| 5311 |
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
| 5312 |
|
|
}
|
| 5313 |
|
|
|
| 5314 |
|
|
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
| 5315 |
|
|
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
| 5316 |
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
| 5317 |
|
|
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
| 5318 |
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
| 5319 |
|
|
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
| 5320 |
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
| 5321 |
|
|
|
| 5322 |
|
|
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
| 5323 |
|
|
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
| 5324 |
|
|
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
| 5325 |
|
|
|
| 5326 |
|
|
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
| 5327 |
|
|
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
| 5328 |
|
|
|
| 5329 |
|
|
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
|
| 5330 |
|
|
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
| 5331 |
|
|
|
| 5332 |
|
|
\newskip\chapheadingskip
|
| 5333 |
|
|
|
| 5334 |
|
|
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
| 5335 |
|
|
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
| 5336 |
|
|
% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
|
| 5337 |
|
|
% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
|
| 5338 |
|
|
% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
|
| 5339 |
|
|
\def\chapoddpage{%
|
| 5340 |
|
|
\chappager
|
| 5341 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \else
|
| 5342 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 5343 |
|
|
\evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
|
| 5344 |
|
|
\oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
|
| 5345 |
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{}%
|
| 5346 |
|
|
\chappager
|
| 5347 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5348 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5349 |
|
|
}
|
| 5350 |
|
|
|
| 5351 |
|
|
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
| 5352 |
|
|
|
| 5353 |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
|
| 5354 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 5355 |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
| 5356 |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
|
| 5357 |
|
|
|
| 5358 |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
|
| 5359 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 5360 |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
| 5361 |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
|
| 5362 |
|
|
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
| 5363 |
|
|
|
| 5364 |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
|
| 5365 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| 5366 |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
| 5367 |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
|
| 5368 |
|
|
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
| 5369 |
|
|
|
| 5370 |
|
|
\CHAPPAGon
|
| 5371 |
|
|
|
| 5372 |
|
|
% Chapter opening.
|
| 5373 |
|
|
%
|
| 5374 |
|
|
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
|
| 5375 |
|
|
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
|
| 5376 |
|
|
%
|
| 5377 |
|
|
% To test against our argument.
|
| 5378 |
|
|
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
|
| 5379 |
|
|
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
|
| 5380 |
|
|
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
|
| 5381 |
|
|
%
|
| 5382 |
|
|
\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
|
| 5383 |
|
|
% Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
|
| 5384 |
|
|
\let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
|
| 5385 |
|
|
\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
| 5386 |
|
|
\gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
|
| 5387 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{}}%
|
| 5388 |
|
|
%
|
| 5389 |
|
|
\def\temptype{#2}%
|
| 5390 |
|
|
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
| 5391 |
|
|
\gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
|
| 5392 |
|
|
\gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
|
| 5393 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
| 5394 |
|
|
\gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
|
| 5395 |
|
|
\gdef\thischapter{}}%
|
| 5396 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
| 5397 |
|
|
\toks0={#1}%
|
| 5398 |
|
|
\xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
|
| 5399 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
|
| 5400 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
|
| 5401 |
|
|
% \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
|
| 5402 |
|
|
% commands in some of the translations.
|
| 5403 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
|
| 5404 |
|
|
\noexpand\thischapternum:
|
| 5405 |
|
|
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
| 5406 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5407 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5408 |
|
|
\toks0={#1}%
|
| 5409 |
|
|
\xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
|
| 5410 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
|
| 5411 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
|
| 5412 |
|
|
% \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
|
| 5413 |
|
|
% commands in some of the translations.
|
| 5414 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
|
| 5415 |
|
|
\noexpand\thischapternum:
|
| 5416 |
|
|
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
| 5417 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5418 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 5419 |
|
|
%
|
| 5420 |
|
|
% Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
|
| 5421 |
|
|
% the preceding space.
|
| 5422 |
|
|
\safewhatsit\domark
|
| 5423 |
|
|
%
|
| 5424 |
|
|
% Insert the chapter heading break.
|
| 5425 |
|
|
\pchapsepmacro
|
| 5426 |
|
|
%
|
| 5427 |
|
|
% Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
|
| 5428 |
|
|
% between here and the heading.
|
| 5429 |
|
|
\let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
|
| 5430 |
|
|
\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
| 5431 |
|
|
\domark
|
| 5432 |
|
|
%
|
| 5433 |
|
|
{%
|
| 5434 |
|
|
\chapfonts \rmisbold
|
| 5435 |
|
|
%
|
| 5436 |
|
|
% Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
|
| 5437 |
|
|
% xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
|
| 5438 |
|
|
% after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
|
| 5439 |
|
|
\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
| 5440 |
|
|
%
|
| 5441 |
|
|
% Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
|
| 5442 |
|
|
% number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
|
| 5443 |
|
|
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
| 5444 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
| 5445 |
|
|
\def\toctype{unnchap}%
|
| 5446 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
| 5447 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
|
| 5448 |
|
|
\def\toctype{omit}%
|
| 5449 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
| 5450 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
|
| 5451 |
|
|
\def\toctype{app}%
|
| 5452 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5453 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
|
| 5454 |
|
|
\def\toctype{numchap}%
|
| 5455 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 5456 |
|
|
%
|
| 5457 |
|
|
% Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
|
| 5458 |
|
|
% \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
|
| 5459 |
|
|
% entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
|
| 5460 |
|
|
\writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
|
| 5461 |
|
|
%
|
| 5462 |
|
|
% For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
|
| 5463 |
|
|
% the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
|
| 5464 |
|
|
% been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
|
| 5465 |
|
|
% text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
|
| 5466 |
|
|
% being visible, for instance under high magnification.
|
| 5467 |
|
|
\donoderef{#2}%
|
| 5468 |
|
|
%
|
| 5469 |
|
|
% Typeset the actual heading.
|
| 5470 |
|
|
\nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
|
| 5471 |
|
|
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
|
| 5472 |
|
|
\hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
| 5473 |
|
|
\unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
| 5474 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5475 |
|
|
\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
| 5476 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 5477 |
|
|
}
|
| 5478 |
|
|
|
| 5479 |
|
|
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
| 5480 |
|
|
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
| 5481 |
|
|
\def\centerparameters{%
|
| 5482 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
| 5483 |
|
|
\leftskip = \rightskip
|
| 5484 |
|
|
\parfillskip = 0pt
|
| 5485 |
|
|
}
|
| 5486 |
|
|
|
| 5487 |
|
|
|
| 5488 |
|
|
% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
|
| 5489 |
|
|
% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
|
| 5490 |
|
|
%
|
| 5491 |
|
|
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
|
| 5492 |
|
|
%
|
| 5493 |
|
|
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
|
| 5494 |
|
|
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| 5495 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
|
| 5496 |
|
|
\rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
| 5497 |
|
|
}
|
| 5498 |
|
|
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
|
| 5499 |
|
|
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
|
| 5500 |
|
|
\par\penalty 5000 %
|
| 5501 |
|
|
}
|
| 5502 |
|
|
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
|
| 5503 |
|
|
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| 5504 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
| 5505 |
|
|
\hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
| 5506 |
|
|
}
|
| 5507 |
|
|
\def\CHAPFopen{%
|
| 5508 |
|
|
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
|
| 5509 |
|
|
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
|
| 5510 |
|
|
|
| 5511 |
|
|
|
| 5512 |
|
|
% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
|
| 5513 |
|
|
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
|
| 5514 |
|
|
%
|
| 5515 |
|
|
\newskip\secheadingskip
|
| 5516 |
|
|
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
|
| 5517 |
|
|
|
| 5518 |
|
|
% Subsection titles.
|
| 5519 |
|
|
\newskip\subsecheadingskip
|
| 5520 |
|
|
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
|
| 5521 |
|
|
|
| 5522 |
|
|
% Subsubsection titles.
|
| 5523 |
|
|
\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
|
| 5524 |
|
|
\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
|
| 5525 |
|
|
|
| 5526 |
|
|
|
| 5527 |
|
|
% Print any size, any type, section title.
|
| 5528 |
|
|
%
|
| 5529 |
|
|
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
|
| 5530 |
|
|
% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
|
| 5531 |
|
|
% section number.
|
| 5532 |
|
|
%
|
| 5533 |
|
|
\def\seckeyword{sec}
|
| 5534 |
|
|
%
|
| 5535 |
|
|
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
|
| 5536 |
|
|
{%
|
| 5537 |
|
|
% Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
| 5538 |
|
|
\csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
|
| 5539 |
|
|
%
|
| 5540 |
|
|
\def\sectionlevel{#2}%
|
| 5541 |
|
|
\def\temptype{#3}%
|
| 5542 |
|
|
%
|
| 5543 |
|
|
% Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
|
| 5544 |
|
|
\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
| 5545 |
|
|
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
| 5546 |
|
|
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
| 5547 |
|
|
\gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
|
| 5548 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
|
| 5549 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5550 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
| 5551 |
|
|
% Don't redefine \thissection.
|
| 5552 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
| 5553 |
|
|
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
| 5554 |
|
|
\toks0={#1}%
|
| 5555 |
|
|
\xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
|
| 5556 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
|
| 5557 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
|
| 5558 |
|
|
% \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
|
| 5559 |
|
|
% commands in some of the translations.
|
| 5560 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
|
| 5561 |
|
|
\noexpand\thissectionnum:
|
| 5562 |
|
|
\noexpand\thissectionname}%
|
| 5563 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5564 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5565 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5566 |
|
|
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
| 5567 |
|
|
\toks0={#1}%
|
| 5568 |
|
|
\xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
|
| 5569 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
|
| 5570 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
|
| 5571 |
|
|
% \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
|
| 5572 |
|
|
% commands in some of the translations.
|
| 5573 |
|
|
\gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
|
| 5574 |
|
|
\noexpand\thissectionnum:
|
| 5575 |
|
|
\noexpand\thissectionname}%
|
| 5576 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5577 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5578 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 5579 |
|
|
%
|
| 5580 |
|
|
% Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
|
| 5581 |
|
|
% don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
|
| 5582 |
|
|
% if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
|
| 5583 |
|
|
\par
|
| 5584 |
|
|
%
|
| 5585 |
|
|
% Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
|
| 5586 |
|
|
% the preceding space.
|
| 5587 |
|
|
\safewhatsit\domark
|
| 5588 |
|
|
%
|
| 5589 |
|
|
% Insert space above the heading.
|
| 5590 |
|
|
\csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
|
| 5591 |
|
|
%
|
| 5592 |
|
|
% Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
|
| 5593 |
|
|
% between here and the heading.
|
| 5594 |
|
|
\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
| 5595 |
|
|
\domark
|
| 5596 |
|
|
%
|
| 5597 |
|
|
% Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
|
| 5598 |
|
|
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
| 5599 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
| 5600 |
|
|
\def\toctype{unn}%
|
| 5601 |
|
|
\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
| 5602 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
| 5603 |
|
|
% for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
|
| 5604 |
|
|
% and don't redefine \lastsection.
|
| 5605 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
| 5606 |
|
|
\def\toctype{omit}%
|
| 5607 |
|
|
\let\sectionlevel=\empty
|
| 5608 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
| 5609 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
| 5610 |
|
|
\def\toctype{app}%
|
| 5611 |
|
|
\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
| 5612 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5613 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
| 5614 |
|
|
\def\toctype{num}%
|
| 5615 |
|
|
\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
| 5616 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 5617 |
|
|
%
|
| 5618 |
|
|
% Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
|
| 5619 |
|
|
\writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
|
| 5620 |
|
|
%
|
| 5621 |
|
|
% Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
|
| 5622 |
|
|
% Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
|
| 5623 |
|
|
\donoderef{#3}%
|
| 5624 |
|
|
%
|
| 5625 |
|
|
% Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
|
| 5626 |
|
|
% That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
|
| 5627 |
|
|
% preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
|
| 5628 |
|
|
% \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
|
| 5629 |
|
|
% break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
|
| 5630 |
|
|
% section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
|
| 5631 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 5632 |
|
|
%
|
| 5633 |
|
|
% Output the actual section heading.
|
| 5634 |
|
|
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
|
| 5635 |
|
|
\hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
|
| 5636 |
|
|
\unhbox0 #1}%
|
| 5637 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5638 |
|
|
% Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
|
| 5639 |
|
|
% Don't allow stretch, though.
|
| 5640 |
|
|
\kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
|
| 5641 |
|
|
%
|
| 5642 |
|
|
% Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
|
| 5643 |
|
|
% was followed by glue.
|
| 5644 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 5645 |
|
|
%
|
| 5646 |
|
|
% We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
|
| 5647 |
|
|
% glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
|
| 5648 |
|
|
% discardable item.)
|
| 5649 |
|
|
\vskip-\parskip
|
| 5650 |
|
|
%
|
| 5651 |
|
|
% This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
|
| 5652 |
|
|
% 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
|
| 5653 |
|
|
% section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
|
| 5654 |
|
|
%
|
| 5655 |
|
|
% @section sec-whatever
|
| 5656 |
|
|
% @deffn def-whatever
|
| 5657 |
|
|
\penalty 10001
|
| 5658 |
|
|
}
|
| 5659 |
|
|
|
| 5660 |
|
|
|
| 5661 |
|
|
\message{toc,}
|
| 5662 |
|
|
% Table of contents.
|
| 5663 |
|
|
\newwrite\tocfile
|
| 5664 |
|
|
|
| 5665 |
|
|
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
|
| 5666 |
|
|
% Called from @chapter, etc.
|
| 5667 |
|
|
%
|
| 5668 |
|
|
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
|
| 5669 |
|
|
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
|
| 5670 |
|
|
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
|
| 5671 |
|
|
% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
|
| 5672 |
|
|
% destination to jump to.
|
| 5673 |
|
|
%
|
| 5674 |
|
|
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
|
| 5675 |
|
|
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
|
| 5676 |
|
|
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
|
| 5677 |
|
|
% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
|
| 5678 |
|
|
%
|
| 5679 |
|
|
\newif\iftocfileopened
|
| 5680 |
|
|
\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
|
| 5681 |
|
|
%
|
| 5682 |
|
|
\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
|
| 5683 |
|
|
\edef\writetoctype{#1}%
|
| 5684 |
|
|
\ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
|
| 5685 |
|
|
\iftocfileopened\else
|
| 5686 |
|
|
\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
|
| 5687 |
|
|
\global\tocfileopenedtrue
|
| 5688 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5689 |
|
|
%
|
| 5690 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 5691 |
|
|
{\atdummies
|
| 5692 |
|
|
\edef\temp{%
|
| 5693 |
|
|
\write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
| 5694 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 5695 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5696 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5697 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5698 |
|
|
%
|
| 5699 |
|
|
% Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
|
| 5700 |
|
|
% writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
|
| 5701 |
|
|
% just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
|
| 5702 |
|
|
% 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
|
| 5703 |
|
|
% two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
|
| 5704 |
|
|
% `1', and two named `2'.
|
| 5705 |
|
|
\ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
|
| 5706 |
|
|
}
|
| 5707 |
|
|
|
| 5708 |
|
|
|
| 5709 |
|
|
% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
|
| 5710 |
|
|
% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
|
| 5711 |
|
|
% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
|
| 5712 |
|
|
%
|
| 5713 |
|
|
\def\activecatcodes{%
|
| 5714 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\active
|
| 5715 |
|
|
\catcode`\$=\active
|
| 5716 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\active
|
| 5717 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\active
|
| 5718 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active
|
| 5719 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\active
|
| 5720 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
| 5721 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\active
|
| 5722 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\active
|
| 5723 |
|
|
}
|
| 5724 |
|
|
|
| 5725 |
|
|
|
| 5726 |
|
|
% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
|
| 5727 |
|
|
\def\readtocfile{%
|
| 5728 |
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
| 5729 |
|
|
\activecatcodes
|
| 5730 |
|
|
\input \tocreadfilename
|
| 5731 |
|
|
}
|
| 5732 |
|
|
|
| 5733 |
|
|
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
| 5734 |
|
|
\newcount\savepageno
|
| 5735 |
|
|
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
|
| 5736 |
|
|
|
| 5737 |
|
|
% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
|
| 5738 |
|
|
%
|
| 5739 |
|
|
\def\startcontents#1{%
|
| 5740 |
|
|
% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
| 5741 |
|
|
% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
|
| 5742 |
|
|
% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
|
| 5743 |
|
|
% From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
|
| 5744 |
|
|
\contentsalignmacro
|
| 5745 |
|
|
\immediate\closeout\tocfile
|
| 5746 |
|
|
%
|
| 5747 |
|
|
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
| 5748 |
|
|
% It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
| 5749 |
|
|
\chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
|
| 5750 |
|
|
%
|
| 5751 |
|
|
\savepageno = \pageno
|
| 5752 |
|
|
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
| 5753 |
|
|
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
| 5754 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
| 5755 |
|
|
%
|
| 5756 |
|
|
% Roman numerals for page numbers.
|
| 5757 |
|
|
\ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
|
| 5758 |
|
|
}
|
| 5759 |
|
|
|
| 5760 |
|
|
% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
|
| 5761 |
|
|
% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
|
| 5762 |
|
|
%
|
| 5763 |
|
|
\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
|
| 5764 |
|
|
|
| 5765 |
|
|
% Normal (long) toc.
|
| 5766 |
|
|
%
|
| 5767 |
|
|
\def\contents{%
|
| 5768 |
|
|
\startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
|
| 5769 |
|
|
\openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
|
| 5770 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 5771 |
|
|
\readtocfile
|
| 5772 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5773 |
|
|
\vfill \eject
|
| 5774 |
|
|
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
| 5775 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 5776 |
|
|
\pdfmakeoutlines
|
| 5777 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5778 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 5779 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5780 |
|
|
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
| 5781 |
|
|
\global\pageno = \savepageno
|
| 5782 |
|
|
}
|
| 5783 |
|
|
|
| 5784 |
|
|
% And just the chapters.
|
| 5785 |
|
|
\def\summarycontents{%
|
| 5786 |
|
|
\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
|
| 5787 |
|
|
%
|
| 5788 |
|
|
\let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
|
| 5789 |
|
|
\let\appentry = \shortchapentry
|
| 5790 |
|
|
\let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
|
| 5791 |
|
|
% We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
| 5792 |
|
|
\secfonts
|
| 5793 |
|
|
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
|
| 5794 |
|
|
\let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
|
| 5795 |
|
|
\rm
|
| 5796 |
|
|
\hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
| 5797 |
|
|
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
| 5798 |
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
|
| 5799 |
|
|
\let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| 5800 |
|
|
\let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| 5801 |
|
|
\let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| 5802 |
|
|
\let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| 5803 |
|
|
\let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| 5804 |
|
|
\let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| 5805 |
|
|
\let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| 5806 |
|
|
\let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| 5807 |
|
|
\openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
|
| 5808 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 5809 |
|
|
\readtocfile
|
| 5810 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5811 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 5812 |
|
|
\vfill \eject
|
| 5813 |
|
|
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
| 5814 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5815 |
|
|
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
| 5816 |
|
|
\global\pageno = \savepageno
|
| 5817 |
|
|
}
|
| 5818 |
|
|
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
| 5819 |
|
|
|
| 5820 |
|
|
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
| 5821 |
|
|
% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
| 5822 |
|
|
%
|
| 5823 |
|
|
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
| 5824 |
|
|
% This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
| 5825 |
|
|
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
| 5826 |
|
|
% But use \hss just in case.
|
| 5827 |
|
|
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
| 5828 |
|
|
% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
| 5829 |
|
|
%
|
| 5830 |
|
|
% We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
|
| 5831 |
|
|
% with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
|
| 5832 |
|
|
% left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
|
| 5833 |
|
|
% chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
|
| 5834 |
|
|
% there are before deciding ...
|
| 5835 |
|
|
\hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
|
| 5836 |
|
|
}
|
| 5837 |
|
|
|
| 5838 |
|
|
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
| 5839 |
|
|
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
| 5840 |
|
|
% The last argument is the page number.
|
| 5841 |
|
|
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
| 5842 |
|
|
|
| 5843 |
|
|
% Chapters, in the main contents.
|
| 5844 |
|
|
\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| 5845 |
|
|
%
|
| 5846 |
|
|
% Chapters, in the short toc.
|
| 5847 |
|
|
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
|
| 5848 |
|
|
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
|
| 5849 |
|
|
\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
|
| 5850 |
|
|
}
|
| 5851 |
|
|
|
| 5852 |
|
|
% Appendices, in the main contents.
|
| 5853 |
|
|
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
|
| 5854 |
|
|
%
|
| 5855 |
|
|
\def\appendixbox#1{%
|
| 5856 |
|
|
% We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
|
| 5857 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
|
| 5858 |
|
|
\hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
|
| 5859 |
|
|
%
|
| 5860 |
|
|
\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| 5861 |
|
|
|
| 5862 |
|
|
% Unnumbered chapters.
|
| 5863 |
|
|
\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| 5864 |
|
|
\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
|
| 5865 |
|
|
|
| 5866 |
|
|
% Sections.
|
| 5867 |
|
|
\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| 5868 |
|
|
\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
|
| 5869 |
|
|
\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| 5870 |
|
|
|
| 5871 |
|
|
% Subsections.
|
| 5872 |
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| 5873 |
|
|
\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
|
| 5874 |
|
|
\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| 5875 |
|
|
|
| 5876 |
|
|
% And subsubsections.
|
| 5877 |
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| 5878 |
|
|
\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
|
| 5879 |
|
|
\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| 5880 |
|
|
|
| 5881 |
|
|
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
| 5882 |
|
|
% Same as \defaultparindent.
|
| 5883 |
|
|
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
|
| 5884 |
|
|
|
| 5885 |
|
|
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
| 5886 |
|
|
% page number.
|
| 5887 |
|
|
%
|
| 5888 |
|
|
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
| 5889 |
|
|
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
| 5890 |
|
|
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
| 5891 |
|
|
\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
| 5892 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 5893 |
|
|
\chapentryfonts
|
| 5894 |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| 5895 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5896 |
|
|
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
| 5897 |
|
|
}
|
| 5898 |
|
|
|
| 5899 |
|
|
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| 5900 |
|
|
\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
| 5901 |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| 5902 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 5903 |
|
|
|
| 5904 |
|
|
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| 5905 |
|
|
\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
| 5906 |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| 5907 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 5908 |
|
|
|
| 5909 |
|
|
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| 5910 |
|
|
\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
| 5911 |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| 5912 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 5913 |
|
|
|
| 5914 |
|
|
% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
|
| 5915 |
|
|
\let\tocentry = \entry
|
| 5916 |
|
|
|
| 5917 |
|
|
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
| 5918 |
|
|
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
| 5919 |
|
|
|
| 5920 |
|
|
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
| 5921 |
|
|
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
| 5922 |
|
|
|
| 5923 |
|
|
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
| 5924 |
|
|
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
| 5925 |
|
|
\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
| 5926 |
|
|
\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
| 5927 |
|
|
|
| 5928 |
|
|
|
| 5929 |
|
|
\message{environments,}
|
| 5930 |
|
|
% @foo ... @end foo.
|
| 5931 |
|
|
|
| 5932 |
|
|
% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
|
| 5933 |
|
|
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
| 5934 |
|
|
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
|
| 5935 |
|
|
|
| 5936 |
|
|
\envdef\tex{%
|
| 5937 |
|
|
\setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
|
| 5938 |
|
|
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
| 5939 |
|
|
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
| 5940 |
|
|
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
|
| 5941 |
|
|
\catcode `\%=14
|
| 5942 |
|
|
\catcode `\+=\other
|
| 5943 |
|
|
\catcode `\"=\other
|
| 5944 |
|
|
\catcode `\|=\other
|
| 5945 |
|
|
\catcode `\<=\other
|
| 5946 |
|
|
\catcode `\>=\other
|
| 5947 |
|
|
\catcode`\`=\other
|
| 5948 |
|
|
\catcode`\'=\other
|
| 5949 |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\
|
| 5950 |
|
|
%
|
| 5951 |
|
|
\let\b=\ptexb
|
| 5952 |
|
|
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
| 5953 |
|
|
\let\c=\ptexc
|
| 5954 |
|
|
\let\,=\ptexcomma
|
| 5955 |
|
|
\let\.=\ptexdot
|
| 5956 |
|
|
\let\dots=\ptexdots
|
| 5957 |
|
|
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
| 5958 |
|
|
\let\!=\ptexexclam
|
| 5959 |
|
|
\let\i=\ptexi
|
| 5960 |
|
|
\let\indent=\ptexindent
|
| 5961 |
|
|
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
| 5962 |
|
|
\let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
| 5963 |
|
|
\let\+=\tabalign
|
| 5964 |
|
|
\let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
| 5965 |
|
|
\let\/=\ptexslash
|
| 5966 |
|
|
\let\*=\ptexstar
|
| 5967 |
|
|
\let\t=\ptext
|
| 5968 |
|
|
\expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
|
| 5969 |
|
|
\let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
|
| 5970 |
|
|
%
|
| 5971 |
|
|
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
| 5972 |
|
|
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
| 5973 |
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
| 5974 |
|
|
}
|
| 5975 |
|
|
% There is no need to define \Etex.
|
| 5976 |
|
|
|
| 5977 |
|
|
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
|
| 5978 |
|
|
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
|
| 5979 |
|
|
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
| 5980 |
|
|
|
| 5981 |
|
|
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
| 5982 |
|
|
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
| 5983 |
|
|
|
| 5984 |
|
|
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
| 5985 |
|
|
% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
| 5986 |
|
|
% have any width.
|
| 5987 |
|
|
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
| 5988 |
|
|
|
| 5989 |
|
|
% This space is always present above and below environments.
|
| 5990 |
|
|
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
| 5991 |
|
|
|
| 5992 |
|
|
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
| 5993 |
|
|
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
| 5994 |
|
|
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
| 5995 |
|
|
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
|
| 5996 |
|
|
%
|
| 5997 |
|
|
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
|
| 5998 |
|
|
% =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
|
| 5999 |
|
|
% \sectionheading, q.v.
|
| 6000 |
|
|
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
|
| 6001 |
|
|
\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
| 6002 |
|
|
\endgraf
|
| 6003 |
|
|
\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
| 6004 |
|
|
\removelastskip
|
| 6005 |
|
|
% it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
|
| 6006 |
|
|
% or better ...
|
| 6007 |
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
|
| 6008 |
|
|
\vskip\envskipamount
|
| 6009 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6010 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6011 |
|
|
}}
|
| 6012 |
|
|
|
| 6013 |
|
|
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
|
| 6014 |
|
|
|
| 6015 |
|
|
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
|
| 6016 |
|
|
% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
|
| 6017 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
| 6018 |
|
|
|
| 6019 |
|
|
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
|
| 6020 |
|
|
% environment contents.
|
| 6021 |
|
|
\font\circle=lcircle10
|
| 6022 |
|
|
\newdimen\circthick
|
| 6023 |
|
|
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
| 6024 |
|
|
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
| 6025 |
|
|
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
| 6026 |
|
|
%
|
| 6027 |
|
|
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
| 6028 |
|
|
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
| 6029 |
|
|
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
| 6030 |
|
|
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
| 6031 |
|
|
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
| 6032 |
|
|
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
| 6033 |
|
|
\hskip\rskip}}
|
| 6034 |
|
|
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
| 6035 |
|
|
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
| 6036 |
|
|
\hskip\rskip}}
|
| 6037 |
|
|
%
|
| 6038 |
|
|
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
| 6039 |
|
|
|
| 6040 |
|
|
\envdef\cartouche{%
|
| 6041 |
|
|
\ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
|
| 6042 |
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
| 6043 |
|
|
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
| 6044 |
|
|
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
|
| 6045 |
|
|
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
| 6046 |
|
|
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
| 6047 |
|
|
\cartouter=\hsize
|
| 6048 |
|
|
\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
| 6049 |
|
|
% side, and for 6pt waste from
|
| 6050 |
|
|
% each corner char, and rule thickness
|
| 6051 |
|
|
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
| 6052 |
|
|
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
|
| 6053 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| 6054 |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
| 6055 |
|
|
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
| 6056 |
|
|
\carttop
|
| 6057 |
|
|
\hbox\bgroup
|
| 6058 |
|
|
\hskip\lskip
|
| 6059 |
|
|
\vrule\kern3pt
|
| 6060 |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
| 6061 |
|
|
\kern3pt
|
| 6062 |
|
|
\hsize=\cartinner
|
| 6063 |
|
|
\baselineskip=\normbskip
|
| 6064 |
|
|
\lineskip=\normlskip
|
| 6065 |
|
|
\parskip=\normpskip
|
| 6066 |
|
|
\vskip -\parskip
|
| 6067 |
|
|
\comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
|
| 6068 |
|
|
}
|
| 6069 |
|
|
\def\Ecartouche{%
|
| 6070 |
|
|
\ifhmode\par\fi
|
| 6071 |
|
|
\kern3pt
|
| 6072 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 6073 |
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule
|
| 6074 |
|
|
\hskip\rskip
|
| 6075 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 6076 |
|
|
\cartbot
|
| 6077 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 6078 |
|
|
\checkinserts
|
| 6079 |
|
|
}
|
| 6080 |
|
|
|
| 6081 |
|
|
|
| 6082 |
|
|
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
| 6083 |
|
|
% inside a group.
|
| 6084 |
|
|
\newdimen\nonfillparindent
|
| 6085 |
|
|
\def\nonfillstart{%
|
| 6086 |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
| 6087 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
|
| 6088 |
|
|
\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
| 6089 |
|
|
\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
| 6090 |
|
|
\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
| 6091 |
|
|
\parskip = 0pt
|
| 6092 |
|
|
% Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
|
| 6093 |
|
|
% the normal \indent.
|
| 6094 |
|
|
\nonfillparindent=\parindent
|
| 6095 |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt
|
| 6096 |
|
|
\let\indent\nonfillindent
|
| 6097 |
|
|
%
|
| 6098 |
|
|
\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
| 6099 |
|
|
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
| 6100 |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| 6101 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
| 6102 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6103 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
| 6104 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6105 |
|
|
\let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
| 6106 |
|
|
}
|
| 6107 |
|
|
|
| 6108 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6109 |
|
|
\obeyspaces
|
| 6110 |
|
|
% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
|
| 6111 |
|
|
% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
|
| 6112 |
|
|
% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
|
| 6113 |
|
|
% @indent.
|
| 6114 |
|
|
\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
|
| 6115 |
|
|
\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
|
| 6116 |
|
|
\ifx\temp %
|
| 6117 |
|
|
\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
|
| 6118 |
|
|
\else%
|
| 6119 |
|
|
\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
|
| 6120 |
|
|
\fi%
|
| 6121 |
|
|
}%
|
| 6122 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6123 |
|
|
\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
|
| 6124 |
|
|
\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
|
| 6125 |
|
|
|
| 6126 |
|
|
% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
|
| 6127 |
|
|
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
|
| 6128 |
|
|
% This affects the following displayed environments:
|
| 6129 |
|
|
% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
|
| 6130 |
|
|
%
|
| 6131 |
|
|
\def\smallword{small}
|
| 6132 |
|
|
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
|
| 6133 |
|
|
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
|
| 6134 |
|
|
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
|
| 6135 |
|
|
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
|
| 6136 |
|
|
% end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
|
| 6137 |
|
|
% line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
|
| 6138 |
|
|
% we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
|
| 6139 |
|
|
% to change the fonts afterward.
|
| 6140 |
|
|
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
|
| 6141 |
|
|
\smallexamplefonts \rm
|
| 6142 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6143 |
|
|
}
|
| 6144 |
|
|
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
|
| 6145 |
|
|
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
|
| 6146 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6147 |
|
|
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
|
| 6148 |
|
|
\smallexamplefonts \rm
|
| 6149 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6150 |
|
|
}
|
| 6151 |
|
|
|
| 6152 |
|
|
% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
|
| 6153 |
|
|
% Let's do it by one command:
|
| 6154 |
|
|
\def\makedispenv #1#2{
|
| 6155 |
|
|
\expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
|
| 6156 |
|
|
\expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
|
| 6157 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
| 6158 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
| 6159 |
|
|
}
|
| 6160 |
|
|
|
| 6161 |
|
|
% Define two synonyms:
|
| 6162 |
|
|
\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
|
| 6163 |
|
|
\makedispenv{#1}{#3}
|
| 6164 |
|
|
\makedispenv{#2}{#3}
|
| 6165 |
|
|
}
|
| 6166 |
|
|
|
| 6167 |
|
|
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
|
| 6168 |
|
|
%
|
| 6169 |
|
|
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
|
| 6170 |
|
|
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
| 6171 |
|
|
%
|
| 6172 |
|
|
\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
|
| 6173 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 6174 |
|
|
\tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
|
| 6175 |
|
|
\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
|
| 6176 |
|
|
\gobble % eat return
|
| 6177 |
|
|
}
|
| 6178 |
|
|
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
|
| 6179 |
|
|
%
|
| 6180 |
|
|
\makedispenv {display}{%
|
| 6181 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 6182 |
|
|
\gobble
|
| 6183 |
|
|
}
|
| 6184 |
|
|
|
| 6185 |
|
|
% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
| 6186 |
|
|
%
|
| 6187 |
|
|
\makedispenv{format}{%
|
| 6188 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| 6189 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 6190 |
|
|
\gobble
|
| 6191 |
|
|
}
|
| 6192 |
|
|
|
| 6193 |
|
|
% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
|
| 6194 |
|
|
\envdef\flushleft{%
|
| 6195 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| 6196 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 6197 |
|
|
\gobble
|
| 6198 |
|
|
}
|
| 6199 |
|
|
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
|
| 6200 |
|
|
|
| 6201 |
|
|
% @flushright.
|
| 6202 |
|
|
%
|
| 6203 |
|
|
\envdef\flushright{%
|
| 6204 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| 6205 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 6206 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
|
| 6207 |
|
|
\gobble
|
| 6208 |
|
|
}
|
| 6209 |
|
|
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
|
| 6210 |
|
|
|
| 6211 |
|
|
|
| 6212 |
|
|
% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
|
| 6213 |
|
|
% justification. From plain.tex.
|
| 6214 |
|
|
\envdef\raggedright{%
|
| 6215 |
|
|
\rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
|
| 6216 |
|
|
}
|
| 6217 |
|
|
\let\Eraggedright\par
|
| 6218 |
|
|
|
| 6219 |
|
|
\envdef\raggedleft{%
|
| 6220 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
|
| 6221 |
|
|
\spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
|
| 6222 |
|
|
\hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
|
| 6223 |
|
|
% badness reporting.
|
| 6224 |
|
|
}
|
| 6225 |
|
|
\let\Eraggedleft\par
|
| 6226 |
|
|
|
| 6227 |
|
|
\envdef\raggedcenter{%
|
| 6228 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
|
| 6229 |
|
|
\spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
|
| 6230 |
|
|
\hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
|
| 6231 |
|
|
% badness reporting.
|
| 6232 |
|
|
}
|
| 6233 |
|
|
\let\Eraggedcenter\par
|
| 6234 |
|
|
|
| 6235 |
|
|
|
| 6236 |
|
|
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
| 6237 |
|
|
% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
|
| 6238 |
|
|
% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
|
| 6239 |
|
|
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
|
| 6240 |
|
|
%
|
| 6241 |
|
|
\def\quotationstart{%
|
| 6242 |
|
|
{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
| 6243 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
| 6244 |
|
|
%
|
| 6245 |
|
|
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
| 6246 |
|
|
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
| 6247 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| 6248 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| 6249 |
|
|
\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
| 6250 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6251 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
| 6252 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6253 |
|
|
\parsearg\quotationlabel
|
| 6254 |
|
|
}
|
| 6255 |
|
|
|
| 6256 |
|
|
\envdef\quotation{%
|
| 6257 |
|
|
\setnormaldispenv
|
| 6258 |
|
|
\quotationstart
|
| 6259 |
|
|
}
|
| 6260 |
|
|
|
| 6261 |
|
|
\envdef\smallquotation{%
|
| 6262 |
|
|
\setsmalldispenv
|
| 6263 |
|
|
\quotationstart
|
| 6264 |
|
|
}
|
| 6265 |
|
|
\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation
|
| 6266 |
|
|
|
| 6267 |
|
|
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
| 6268 |
|
|
% doing normal filling.
|
| 6269 |
|
|
%
|
| 6270 |
|
|
\def\Equotation{%
|
| 6271 |
|
|
\par
|
| 6272 |
|
|
\ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
|
| 6273 |
|
|
% indent a bit.
|
| 6274 |
|
|
\leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
|
| 6275 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6276 |
|
|
{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
|
| 6277 |
|
|
}
|
| 6278 |
|
|
|
| 6279 |
|
|
% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
|
| 6280 |
|
|
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
|
| 6281 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 6282 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
| 6283 |
|
|
{\bf #1: }%
|
| 6284 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6285 |
|
|
}
|
| 6286 |
|
|
|
| 6287 |
|
|
|
| 6288 |
|
|
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
|
| 6289 |
|
|
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
|
| 6290 |
|
|
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
|
| 6291 |
|
|
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
|
| 6292 |
|
|
%
|
| 6293 |
|
|
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
|
| 6294 |
|
|
%
|
| 6295 |
|
|
% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
|
| 6296 |
|
|
% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
|
| 6297 |
|
|
% verbatim line.
|
| 6298 |
|
|
\def\dospecials{%
|
| 6299 |
|
|
\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
|
| 6300 |
|
|
\do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
|
| 6301 |
|
|
\do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
|
| 6302 |
|
|
% Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
|
| 6303 |
|
|
% @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
|
| 6304 |
|
|
% @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
|
| 6305 |
|
|
%\do\`\do\'%
|
| 6306 |
|
|
}
|
| 6307 |
|
|
%
|
| 6308 |
|
|
% [Knuth] p. 380
|
| 6309 |
|
|
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
|
| 6310 |
|
|
\def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
|
| 6311 |
|
|
%
|
| 6312 |
|
|
% Setup for the @verb command.
|
| 6313 |
|
|
%
|
| 6314 |
|
|
% Eight spaces for a tab
|
| 6315 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6316 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| 6317 |
|
|
\gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
|
| 6318 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6319 |
|
|
%
|
| 6320 |
|
|
\def\setupverb{%
|
| 6321 |
|
|
\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
| 6322 |
|
|
\def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
|
| 6323 |
|
|
\setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
|
| 6324 |
|
|
\tabeightspaces
|
| 6325 |
|
|
% Respect line breaks,
|
| 6326 |
|
|
% print special symbols as themselves, and
|
| 6327 |
|
|
% make each space count
|
| 6328 |
|
|
% must do in this order:
|
| 6329 |
|
|
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
| 6330 |
|
|
}
|
| 6331 |
|
|
|
| 6332 |
|
|
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
|
| 6333 |
|
|
%
|
| 6334 |
|
|
% Real tab expansion
|
| 6335 |
|
|
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
|
| 6336 |
|
|
%
|
| 6337 |
|
|
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
|
| 6338 |
|
|
%
|
| 6339 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6340 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| 6341 |
|
|
\gdef\tabexpand{%
|
| 6342 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| 6343 |
|
|
\def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
|
| 6344 |
|
|
\dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
|
| 6345 |
|
|
\divide\dimen0 by\tabw
|
| 6346 |
|
|
\multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
|
| 6347 |
|
|
\advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
|
| 6348 |
|
|
\wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
|
| 6349 |
|
|
}%
|
| 6350 |
|
|
}
|
| 6351 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6352 |
|
|
|
| 6353 |
|
|
% start the verbatim environment.
|
| 6354 |
|
|
\def\setupverbatim{%
|
| 6355 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| 6356 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 6357 |
|
|
% Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
| 6358 |
|
|
\tt
|
| 6359 |
|
|
\def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
|
| 6360 |
|
|
\tabexpand
|
| 6361 |
|
|
\setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
|
| 6362 |
|
|
% Respect line breaks,
|
| 6363 |
|
|
% print special symbols as themselves, and
|
| 6364 |
|
|
% make each space count
|
| 6365 |
|
|
% must do in this order:
|
| 6366 |
|
|
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
| 6367 |
|
|
\everypar{\starttabbox}%
|
| 6368 |
|
|
}
|
| 6369 |
|
|
|
| 6370 |
|
|
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
|
| 6371 |
|
|
% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
|
| 6372 |
|
|
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
|
| 6373 |
|
|
%
|
| 6374 |
|
|
% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
|
| 6375 |
|
|
%
|
| 6376 |
|
|
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
|
| 6377 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6378 |
|
|
\catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
|
| 6379 |
|
|
\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
|
| 6380 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6381 |
|
|
%
|
| 6382 |
|
|
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
|
| 6383 |
|
|
%
|
| 6384 |
|
|
%
|
| 6385 |
|
|
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
|
| 6386 |
|
|
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
|
| 6387 |
|
|
%
|
| 6388 |
|
|
% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
|
| 6389 |
|
|
%
|
| 6390 |
|
|
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
|
| 6391 |
|
|
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
|
| 6392 |
|
|
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
|
| 6393 |
|
|
%
|
| 6394 |
|
|
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
|
| 6395 |
|
|
%
|
| 6396 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6397 |
|
|
\catcode`\ =\active
|
| 6398 |
|
|
\obeylines %
|
| 6399 |
|
|
% ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
|
| 6400 |
|
|
% of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
|
| 6401 |
|
|
% line in the output.
|
| 6402 |
|
|
\xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
|
| 6403 |
|
|
% We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
|
| 6404 |
|
|
% without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
|
| 6405 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6406 |
|
|
%
|
| 6407 |
|
|
\envdef\verbatim{%
|
| 6408 |
|
|
\setupverbatim\doverbatim
|
| 6409 |
|
|
}
|
| 6410 |
|
|
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
|
| 6411 |
|
|
|
| 6412 |
|
|
|
| 6413 |
|
|
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
|
| 6414 |
|
|
%
|
| 6415 |
|
|
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
|
| 6416 |
|
|
%
|
| 6417 |
|
|
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
|
| 6418 |
|
|
{%
|
| 6419 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
| 6420 |
|
|
\setupverbatim
|
| 6421 |
|
|
\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
| 6422 |
|
|
\input #1
|
| 6423 |
|
|
\afterenvbreak
|
| 6424 |
|
|
}%
|
| 6425 |
|
|
}
|
| 6426 |
|
|
|
| 6427 |
|
|
% @copying ... @end copying.
|
| 6428 |
|
|
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
|
| 6429 |
|
|
%
|
| 6430 |
|
|
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
|
| 6431 |
|
|
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
|
| 6432 |
|
|
% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
|
| 6433 |
|
|
% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
|
| 6434 |
|
|
% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
|
| 6435 |
|
|
% possible is very desirable.
|
| 6436 |
|
|
%
|
| 6437 |
|
|
\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
|
| 6438 |
|
|
\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
|
| 6439 |
|
|
%
|
| 6440 |
|
|
\def\insertcopying{%
|
| 6441 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6442 |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
|
| 6443 |
|
|
\scanexp\copyingtext
|
| 6444 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6445 |
|
|
}
|
| 6446 |
|
|
|
| 6447 |
|
|
|
| 6448 |
|
|
\message{defuns,}
|
| 6449 |
|
|
% @defun etc.
|
| 6450 |
|
|
|
| 6451 |
|
|
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
| 6452 |
|
|
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
| 6453 |
|
|
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
| 6454 |
|
|
\newcount\defunpenalty
|
| 6455 |
|
|
|
| 6456 |
|
|
% Start the processing of @deffn:
|
| 6457 |
|
|
\def\startdefun{%
|
| 6458 |
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
|
| 6459 |
|
|
\medbreak
|
| 6460 |
|
|
\defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
|
| 6461 |
|
|
% following @def command, see below.
|
| 6462 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6463 |
|
|
% If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
|
| 6464 |
|
|
% which is there to keep the function description together with its
|
| 6465 |
|
|
% header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
|
| 6466 |
|
|
% break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
|
| 6467 |
|
|
% by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
|
| 6468 |
|
|
% commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
|
| 6469 |
|
|
% a break between a section heading and a defun.
|
| 6470 |
|
|
%
|
| 6471 |
|
|
% As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
|
| 6472 |
|
|
% with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
|
| 6473 |
|
|
% sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
|
| 6474 |
|
|
% @def command.
|
| 6475 |
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
|
| 6476 |
|
|
%
|
| 6477 |
|
|
% Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
|
| 6478 |
|
|
% But do insert the glue.
|
| 6479 |
|
|
\medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
|
| 6480 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6481 |
|
|
%
|
| 6482 |
|
|
\parindent=0in
|
| 6483 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
| 6484 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
| 6485 |
|
|
}
|
| 6486 |
|
|
|
| 6487 |
|
|
\def\dodefunx#1{%
|
| 6488 |
|
|
% First, check whether we are in the right environment:
|
| 6489 |
|
|
\checkenv#1%
|
| 6490 |
|
|
%
|
| 6491 |
|
|
% As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
|
| 6492 |
|
|
% It's not a great place, though.
|
| 6493 |
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
|
| 6494 |
|
|
%
|
| 6495 |
|
|
% And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
|
| 6496 |
|
|
\expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
|
| 6497 |
|
|
}
|
| 6498 |
|
|
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
|
| 6499 |
|
|
|
| 6500 |
|
|
% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
|
| 6501 |
|
|
%
|
| 6502 |
|
|
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
|
| 6503 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6504 |
|
|
% call \deffnheader:
|
| 6505 |
|
|
#1#2 \endheader
|
| 6506 |
|
|
% common ending:
|
| 6507 |
|
|
\interlinepenalty = 10000
|
| 6508 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
| 6509 |
|
|
\endgraf
|
| 6510 |
|
|
\nobreak\vskip -\parskip
|
| 6511 |
|
|
\penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
|
| 6512 |
|
|
% Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
|
| 6513 |
|
|
% rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
|
| 6514 |
|
|
\checkparencounts
|
| 6515 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6516 |
|
|
}
|
| 6517 |
|
|
|
| 6518 |
|
|
\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
|
| 6519 |
|
|
|
| 6520 |
|
|
% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
|
| 6521 |
|
|
% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
|
| 6522 |
|
|
%
|
| 6523 |
|
|
\def\makedefun#1{%
|
| 6524 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
|
| 6525 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
|
| 6526 |
|
|
\makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
|
| 6527 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 6528 |
|
|
}
|
| 6529 |
|
|
|
| 6530 |
|
|
% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
|
| 6531 |
|
|
%
|
| 6532 |
|
|
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
|
| 6533 |
|
|
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
|
| 6534 |
|
|
%
|
| 6535 |
|
|
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
|
| 6536 |
|
|
\envdef#1{%
|
| 6537 |
|
|
\startdefun
|
| 6538 |
|
|
\parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
|
| 6539 |
|
|
}%
|
| 6540 |
|
|
\def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
|
| 6541 |
|
|
\def#3%
|
| 6542 |
|
|
}
|
| 6543 |
|
|
|
| 6544 |
|
|
%%% Untyped functions:
|
| 6545 |
|
|
|
| 6546 |
|
|
% @deffn category name args
|
| 6547 |
|
|
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
|
| 6548 |
|
|
|
| 6549 |
|
|
% @deffn category class name args
|
| 6550 |
|
|
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
| 6551 |
|
|
|
| 6552 |
|
|
% \defopon {category on}class name args
|
| 6553 |
|
|
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
| 6554 |
|
|
|
| 6555 |
|
|
% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
|
| 6556 |
|
|
%
|
| 6557 |
|
|
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
|
| 6558 |
|
|
% Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
|
| 6559 |
|
|
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
|
| 6560 |
|
|
\defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
|
| 6561 |
|
|
}
|
| 6562 |
|
|
|
| 6563 |
|
|
%%% Typed functions:
|
| 6564 |
|
|
|
| 6565 |
|
|
% @deftypefn category type name args
|
| 6566 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
|
| 6567 |
|
|
|
| 6568 |
|
|
% @deftypeop category class type name args
|
| 6569 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
| 6570 |
|
|
|
| 6571 |
|
|
% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
|
| 6572 |
|
|
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
| 6573 |
|
|
|
| 6574 |
|
|
% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
|
| 6575 |
|
|
%
|
| 6576 |
|
|
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
| 6577 |
|
|
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
| 6578 |
|
|
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
| 6579 |
|
|
}
|
| 6580 |
|
|
|
| 6581 |
|
|
%%% Typed variables:
|
| 6582 |
|
|
|
| 6583 |
|
|
% @deftypevr category type var args
|
| 6584 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
|
| 6585 |
|
|
|
| 6586 |
|
|
% @deftypecv category class type var args
|
| 6587 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
| 6588 |
|
|
|
| 6589 |
|
|
% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
|
| 6590 |
|
|
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
| 6591 |
|
|
|
| 6592 |
|
|
% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
|
| 6593 |
|
|
%
|
| 6594 |
|
|
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
| 6595 |
|
|
\dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
| 6596 |
|
|
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
| 6597 |
|
|
}
|
| 6598 |
|
|
|
| 6599 |
|
|
%%% Untyped variables:
|
| 6600 |
|
|
|
| 6601 |
|
|
% @defvr category var args
|
| 6602 |
|
|
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
|
| 6603 |
|
|
|
| 6604 |
|
|
% @defcv category class var args
|
| 6605 |
|
|
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
| 6606 |
|
|
|
| 6607 |
|
|
% \defcvof {category of}class var args
|
| 6608 |
|
|
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
|
| 6609 |
|
|
|
| 6610 |
|
|
%%% Type:
|
| 6611 |
|
|
% @deftp category name args
|
| 6612 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
|
| 6613 |
|
|
\doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
| 6614 |
|
|
\defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
|
| 6615 |
|
|
}
|
| 6616 |
|
|
|
| 6617 |
|
|
% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
|
| 6618 |
|
|
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
| 6619 |
|
|
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
|
| 6620 |
|
|
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
|
| 6621 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
| 6622 |
|
|
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
| 6623 |
|
|
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
|
| 6624 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
| 6625 |
|
|
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
|
| 6626 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
|
| 6627 |
|
|
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
| 6628 |
|
|
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
| 6629 |
|
|
|
| 6630 |
|
|
% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
|
| 6631 |
|
|
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
|
| 6632 |
|
|
% #2 is the return type, if any.
|
| 6633 |
|
|
% #3 is the function name.
|
| 6634 |
|
|
%
|
| 6635 |
|
|
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
|
| 6636 |
|
|
%
|
| 6637 |
|
|
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
|
| 6638 |
|
|
% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
|
| 6639 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
| 6640 |
|
|
%
|
| 6641 |
|
|
% How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
|
| 6642 |
|
|
% distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
|
| 6643 |
|
|
% just below it.
|
| 6644 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 6645 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
|
| 6646 |
|
|
%
|
| 6647 |
|
|
% Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
|
| 6648 |
|
|
% The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
|
| 6649 |
|
|
% we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
|
| 6650 |
|
|
\dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
|
| 6651 |
|
|
% The continuations:
|
| 6652 |
|
|
\dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
|
| 6653 |
|
|
% (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
|
| 6654 |
|
|
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
|
| 6655 |
|
|
%
|
| 6656 |
|
|
% Put the type name to the right margin.
|
| 6657 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 6658 |
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{%
|
| 6659 |
|
|
\hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
|
| 6660 |
|
|
% \hsize has to be shortened this way:
|
| 6661 |
|
|
\kern\leftskip
|
| 6662 |
|
|
% Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
|
| 6663 |
|
|
}%
|
| 6664 |
|
|
%
|
| 6665 |
|
|
% Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
|
| 6666 |
|
|
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
| 6667 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
| 6668 |
|
|
{%
|
| 6669 |
|
|
% defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
|
| 6670 |
|
|
% . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
|
| 6671 |
|
|
% . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
|
| 6672 |
|
|
% common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
|
| 6673 |
|
|
% tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
|
| 6674 |
|
|
% . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
|
| 6675 |
|
|
% . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
|
| 6676 |
|
|
% one has made identifiers using them :).
|
| 6677 |
|
|
\df \tt
|
| 6678 |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}% return value type
|
| 6679 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
|
| 6680 |
|
|
#3% output function name
|
| 6681 |
|
|
}%
|
| 6682 |
|
|
{\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
|
| 6683 |
|
|
%
|
| 6684 |
|
|
\boldbrax
|
| 6685 |
|
|
% arguments will be output next, if any.
|
| 6686 |
|
|
}
|
| 6687 |
|
|
|
| 6688 |
|
|
% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
|
| 6689 |
|
|
% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
|
| 6690 |
|
|
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
|
| 6691 |
|
|
% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
| 6692 |
|
|
%
|
| 6693 |
|
|
\def\defunargs#1{%
|
| 6694 |
|
|
% use sl by default (not ttsl),
|
| 6695 |
|
|
% tt for the names.
|
| 6696 |
|
|
\df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
|
| 6697 |
|
|
%
|
| 6698 |
|
|
% On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
|
| 6699 |
|
|
% want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
|
| 6700 |
|
|
\def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
|
| 6701 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 6702 |
|
|
\sl\hyphenchar\font=45
|
| 6703 |
|
|
}
|
| 6704 |
|
|
|
| 6705 |
|
|
% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
|
| 6706 |
|
|
%
|
| 6707 |
|
|
\def\activeparens{%
|
| 6708 |
|
|
\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
|
| 6709 |
|
|
\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
|
| 6710 |
|
|
\catcode`\&=\active
|
| 6711 |
|
|
}
|
| 6712 |
|
|
|
| 6713 |
|
|
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
| 6714 |
|
|
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
| 6715 |
|
|
|
| 6716 |
|
|
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
| 6717 |
|
|
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
| 6718 |
|
|
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
| 6719 |
|
|
{
|
| 6720 |
|
|
\activeparens
|
| 6721 |
|
|
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
| 6722 |
|
|
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
| 6723 |
|
|
\global\let& = \&
|
| 6724 |
|
|
|
| 6725 |
|
|
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
| 6726 |
|
|
\gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
|
| 6727 |
|
|
}
|
| 6728 |
|
|
|
| 6729 |
|
|
\newcount\parencount
|
| 6730 |
|
|
|
| 6731 |
|
|
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
| 6732 |
|
|
\newif\ifampseen
|
| 6733 |
|
|
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
|
| 6734 |
|
|
|
| 6735 |
|
|
\def\parenfont{%
|
| 6736 |
|
|
\ifampseen
|
| 6737 |
|
|
% At the first level, print parens in roman,
|
| 6738 |
|
|
% otherwise use the default font.
|
| 6739 |
|
|
\ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
|
| 6740 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6741 |
|
|
% The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
|
| 6742 |
|
|
% the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
|
| 6743 |
|
|
\sf
|
| 6744 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6745 |
|
|
}
|
| 6746 |
|
|
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
|
| 6747 |
|
|
\ifampseen
|
| 6748 |
|
|
\ifnum\parencount=1
|
| 6749 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 6750 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6751 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6752 |
|
|
}
|
| 6753 |
|
|
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
|
| 6754 |
|
|
|
| 6755 |
|
|
\def\opnr{%
|
| 6756 |
|
|
\global\advance\parencount by 1
|
| 6757 |
|
|
{\parenfont(}%
|
| 6758 |
|
|
\infirstlevel \bfafterword
|
| 6759 |
|
|
}
|
| 6760 |
|
|
\def\clnr{%
|
| 6761 |
|
|
{\parenfont)}%
|
| 6762 |
|
|
\infirstlevel \sl
|
| 6763 |
|
|
\global\advance\parencount by -1
|
| 6764 |
|
|
}
|
| 6765 |
|
|
|
| 6766 |
|
|
\newcount\brackcount
|
| 6767 |
|
|
\def\lbrb{%
|
| 6768 |
|
|
\global\advance\brackcount by 1
|
| 6769 |
|
|
{\bf[}%
|
| 6770 |
|
|
}
|
| 6771 |
|
|
\def\rbrb{%
|
| 6772 |
|
|
{\bf]}%
|
| 6773 |
|
|
\global\advance\brackcount by -1
|
| 6774 |
|
|
}
|
| 6775 |
|
|
|
| 6776 |
|
|
\def\checkparencounts{%
|
| 6777 |
|
|
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
|
| 6778 |
|
|
\ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
|
| 6779 |
|
|
}
|
| 6780 |
|
|
% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
|
| 6781 |
|
|
% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
|
| 6782 |
|
|
\def\badparencount{%
|
| 6783 |
|
|
\message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
|
| 6784 |
|
|
\global\parencount=0
|
| 6785 |
|
|
}
|
| 6786 |
|
|
\def\badbrackcount{%
|
| 6787 |
|
|
\message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
|
| 6788 |
|
|
\global\brackcount=0
|
| 6789 |
|
|
}
|
| 6790 |
|
|
|
| 6791 |
|
|
|
| 6792 |
|
|
\message{macros,}
|
| 6793 |
|
|
% @macro.
|
| 6794 |
|
|
|
| 6795 |
|
|
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
|
| 6796 |
|
|
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
|
| 6797 |
|
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
| 6798 |
|
|
\newwrite\macscribble
|
| 6799 |
|
|
\def\scantokens#1{%
|
| 6800 |
|
|
\toks0={#1}%
|
| 6801 |
|
|
\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
|
| 6802 |
|
|
\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
|
| 6803 |
|
|
\immediate\closeout\macscribble
|
| 6804 |
|
|
\input \jobname.tmp
|
| 6805 |
|
|
}
|
| 6806 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6807 |
|
|
|
| 6808 |
|
|
\def\scanmacro#1{%
|
| 6809 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6810 |
|
|
\newlinechar`\^^M
|
| 6811 |
|
|
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
|
| 6812 |
|
|
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
|
| 6813 |
|
|
% When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
|
| 6814 |
|
|
% backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
|
| 6815 |
|
|
% \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
|
| 6816 |
|
|
% with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
|
| 6817 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
|
| 6818 |
|
|
% ... and \example
|
| 6819 |
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
| 6820 |
|
|
%
|
| 6821 |
|
|
% Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
|
| 6822 |
|
|
% I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
|
| 6823 |
|
|
% --kasal, 29nov03
|
| 6824 |
|
|
\scantokens{#1\endinput}%
|
| 6825 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6826 |
|
|
}
|
| 6827 |
|
|
|
| 6828 |
|
|
\def\scanexp#1{%
|
| 6829 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
|
| 6830 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 6831 |
|
|
}
|
| 6832 |
|
|
|
| 6833 |
|
|
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
|
| 6834 |
|
|
\newtoks\macname % Macro name
|
| 6835 |
|
|
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
|
| 6836 |
|
|
|
| 6837 |
|
|
% List of all defined macros in the form
|
| 6838 |
|
|
% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
|
| 6839 |
|
|
% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
|
| 6840 |
|
|
% if there is a need.
|
| 6841 |
|
|
\def\macrolist{}
|
| 6842 |
|
|
|
| 6843 |
|
|
% Add the macro to \macrolist
|
| 6844 |
|
|
\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
|
| 6845 |
|
|
\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
|
| 6846 |
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
|
| 6847 |
|
|
\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
|
| 6848 |
|
|
}
|
| 6849 |
|
|
|
| 6850 |
|
|
% Utility routines.
|
| 6851 |
|
|
% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
|
| 6852 |
|
|
% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
|
| 6853 |
|
|
% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
|
| 6854 |
|
|
%
|
| 6855 |
|
|
\def\cslet#1#2{%
|
| 6856 |
|
|
\expandafter\let
|
| 6857 |
|
|
\csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
|
| 6858 |
|
|
\csname#2\endcsname
|
| 6859 |
|
|
}
|
| 6860 |
|
|
|
| 6861 |
|
|
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
|
| 6862 |
|
|
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
|
| 6863 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=11
|
| 6864 |
|
|
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
|
| 6865 |
|
|
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
|
| 6866 |
|
|
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
|
| 6867 |
|
|
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
|
| 6868 |
|
|
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
|
| 6869 |
|
|
}
|
| 6870 |
|
|
|
| 6871 |
|
|
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
|
| 6872 |
|
|
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
|
| 6873 |
|
|
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
|
| 6874 |
|
|
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
|
| 6875 |
|
|
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
|
| 6876 |
|
|
}
|
| 6877 |
|
|
|
| 6878 |
|
|
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
|
| 6879 |
|
|
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
|
| 6880 |
|
|
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
|
| 6881 |
|
|
|
| 6882 |
|
|
% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
|
| 6883 |
|
|
% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
|
| 6884 |
|
|
% confine the change to the current group.
|
| 6885 |
|
|
|
| 6886 |
|
|
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
|
| 6887 |
|
|
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
|
| 6888 |
|
|
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
|
| 6889 |
|
|
|
| 6890 |
|
|
\def\scanctxt{%
|
| 6891 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other
|
| 6892 |
|
|
\catcode`\+=\other
|
| 6893 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other
|
| 6894 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other
|
| 6895 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=\other
|
| 6896 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other
|
| 6897 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other
|
| 6898 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other
|
| 6899 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other
|
| 6900 |
|
|
\ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
|
| 6901 |
|
|
}
|
| 6902 |
|
|
|
| 6903 |
|
|
\def\scanargctxt{%
|
| 6904 |
|
|
\scanctxt
|
| 6905 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
| 6906 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\other
|
| 6907 |
|
|
}
|
| 6908 |
|
|
|
| 6909 |
|
|
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
|
| 6910 |
|
|
\scanctxt
|
| 6911 |
|
|
\catcode`\{=\other
|
| 6912 |
|
|
\catcode`\}=\other
|
| 6913 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\other
|
| 6914 |
|
|
\usembodybackslash
|
| 6915 |
|
|
}
|
| 6916 |
|
|
|
| 6917 |
|
|
\def\macroargctxt{%
|
| 6918 |
|
|
\scanctxt
|
| 6919 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
| 6920 |
|
|
}
|
| 6921 |
|
|
|
| 6922 |
|
|
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
|
| 6923 |
|
|
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
|
| 6924 |
|
|
% where N is the macro parameter number.
|
| 6925 |
|
|
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
|
| 6926 |
|
|
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
|
| 6927 |
|
|
|
| 6928 |
|
|
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
|
| 6929 |
|
|
@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
|
| 6930 |
|
|
@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
|
| 6931 |
|
|
}
|
| 6932 |
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
|
| 6933 |
|
|
|
| 6934 |
|
|
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
| 6935 |
|
|
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
| 6936 |
|
|
|
| 6937 |
|
|
\def\macroxxx#1{%
|
| 6938 |
|
|
\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
|
| 6939 |
|
|
\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
|
| 6940 |
|
|
\paramno=0%
|
| 6941 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6942 |
|
|
\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
|
| 6943 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6944 |
|
|
\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
|
| 6945 |
|
|
\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
|
| 6946 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6947 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
| 6948 |
|
|
\else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
|
| 6949 |
|
|
\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
|
| 6950 |
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
|
| 6951 |
|
|
\addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
|
| 6952 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6953 |
|
|
\begingroup \macrobodyctxt
|
| 6954 |
|
|
\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
|
| 6955 |
|
|
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
|
| 6956 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 6957 |
|
|
|
| 6958 |
|
|
\parseargdef\unmacro{%
|
| 6959 |
|
|
\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
|
| 6960 |
|
|
\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
|
| 6961 |
|
|
\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
|
| 6962 |
|
|
% Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
|
| 6963 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 6964 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
|
| 6965 |
|
|
\let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
|
| 6966 |
|
|
\xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
|
| 6967 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 6968 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6969 |
|
|
\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
|
| 6970 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6971 |
|
|
}
|
| 6972 |
|
|
|
| 6973 |
|
|
% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
|
| 6974 |
|
|
% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
|
| 6975 |
|
|
%
|
| 6976 |
|
|
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
|
| 6977 |
|
|
\ifx #1\relax
|
| 6978 |
|
|
% remove this
|
| 6979 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6980 |
|
|
\noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
|
| 6981 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6982 |
|
|
}
|
| 6983 |
|
|
|
| 6984 |
|
|
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
|
| 6985 |
|
|
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
|
| 6986 |
|
|
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
|
| 6987 |
|
|
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
|
| 6988 |
|
|
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
|
| 6989 |
|
|
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
|
| 6990 |
|
|
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
|
| 6991 |
|
|
|
| 6992 |
|
|
% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
|
| 6993 |
|
|
% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
|
| 6994 |
|
|
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
|
| 6995 |
|
|
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
|
| 6996 |
|
|
|
| 6997 |
|
|
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
|
| 6998 |
|
|
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
|
| 6999 |
|
|
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
|
| 7000 |
|
|
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
|
| 7001 |
|
|
%
|
| 7002 |
|
|
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
|
| 7003 |
|
|
% the macro is used.
|
| 7004 |
|
|
|
| 7005 |
|
|
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
|
| 7006 |
|
|
\let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
|
| 7007 |
|
|
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
|
| 7008 |
|
|
\if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
| 7009 |
|
|
\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
|
| 7010 |
|
|
\advance\paramno by 1%
|
| 7011 |
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
|
| 7012 |
|
|
{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
|
| 7013 |
|
|
\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
|
| 7014 |
|
|
\fi\next}
|
| 7015 |
|
|
|
| 7016 |
|
|
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
|
| 7017 |
|
|
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
|
| 7018 |
|
|
|
| 7019 |
|
|
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
|
| 7020 |
|
|
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
| 7021 |
|
|
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
|
| 7022 |
|
|
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
| 7023 |
|
|
|
| 7024 |
|
|
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
|
| 7025 |
|
|
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
|
| 7026 |
|
|
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
|
| 7027 |
|
|
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
|
| 7028 |
|
|
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
|
| 7029 |
|
|
\def\defmacro{%
|
| 7030 |
|
|
\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
|
| 7031 |
|
|
\ifrecursive
|
| 7032 |
|
|
\ifcase\paramno
|
| 7033 |
|
|
% 0
|
| 7034 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 7035 |
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| 7036 |
|
|
\or % 1
|
| 7037 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 7038 |
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| 7039 |
|
|
\noexpand\braceorline
|
| 7040 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
| 7041 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
| 7042 |
|
|
\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| 7043 |
|
|
\else % many
|
| 7044 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 7045 |
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| 7046 |
|
|
\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
| 7047 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
| 7048 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
| 7049 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 7050 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef
|
| 7051 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 7052 |
|
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
| 7053 |
|
|
\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| 7054 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7055 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7056 |
|
|
\ifcase\paramno
|
| 7057 |
|
|
% 0
|
| 7058 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 7059 |
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| 7060 |
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| 7061 |
|
|
\or % 1
|
| 7062 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 7063 |
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| 7064 |
|
|
\noexpand\braceorline
|
| 7065 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
| 7066 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
| 7067 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 7068 |
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| 7069 |
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| 7070 |
|
|
\else % many
|
| 7071 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 7072 |
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| 7073 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
| 7074 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
| 7075 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
| 7076 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 7077 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef
|
| 7078 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 7079 |
|
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
| 7080 |
|
|
\paramlist{%
|
| 7081 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 7082 |
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| 7083 |
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| 7084 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7085 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 7086 |
|
|
|
| 7087 |
|
|
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
|
| 7088 |
|
|
|
| 7089 |
|
|
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
|
| 7090 |
|
|
% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
|
| 7091 |
|
|
% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
|
| 7092 |
|
|
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
|
| 7093 |
|
|
\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
|
| 7094 |
|
|
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
|
| 7095 |
|
|
\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
|
| 7096 |
|
|
\expandafter\parsearg
|
| 7097 |
|
|
\fi \macnamexxx}
|
| 7098 |
|
|
|
| 7099 |
|
|
|
| 7100 |
|
|
% @alias.
|
| 7101 |
|
|
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
|
| 7102 |
|
|
% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
|
| 7103 |
|
|
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
|
| 7104 |
|
|
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
|
| 7105 |
|
|
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
|
| 7106 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7107 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
|
| 7108 |
|
|
\addtomacrolist{#1}%
|
| 7109 |
|
|
\xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
|
| 7110 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7111 |
|
|
\next
|
| 7112 |
|
|
}
|
| 7113 |
|
|
|
| 7114 |
|
|
|
| 7115 |
|
|
\message{cross references,}
|
| 7116 |
|
|
|
| 7117 |
|
|
\newwrite\auxfile
|
| 7118 |
|
|
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
| 7119 |
|
|
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
| 7120 |
|
|
|
| 7121 |
|
|
% @inforef is relatively simple.
|
| 7122 |
|
|
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
| 7123 |
|
|
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
| 7124 |
|
|
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
| 7125 |
|
|
|
| 7126 |
|
|
% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
|
| 7127 |
|
|
% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
|
| 7128 |
|
|
% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
|
| 7129 |
|
|
% @node foo , bar , ...
|
| 7130 |
|
|
% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
|
| 7131 |
|
|
%
|
| 7132 |
|
|
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
|
| 7133 |
|
|
%
|
| 7134 |
|
|
% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
|
| 7135 |
|
|
% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
|
| 7136 |
|
|
\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
|
| 7137 |
|
|
\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
|
| 7138 |
|
|
|
| 7139 |
|
|
\let\nwnode=\node
|
| 7140 |
|
|
\let\lastnode=\empty
|
| 7141 |
|
|
|
| 7142 |
|
|
% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
|
| 7143 |
|
|
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
|
| 7144 |
|
|
%
|
| 7145 |
|
|
\def\donoderef#1{%
|
| 7146 |
|
|
\ifx\lastnode\empty\else
|
| 7147 |
|
|
\setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
|
| 7148 |
|
|
\global\let\lastnode=\empty
|
| 7149 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7150 |
|
|
}
|
| 7151 |
|
|
|
| 7152 |
|
|
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
|
| 7153 |
|
|
%
|
| 7154 |
|
|
\newcount\savesfregister
|
| 7155 |
|
|
%
|
| 7156 |
|
|
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
|
| 7157 |
|
|
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
|
| 7158 |
|
|
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
|
| 7159 |
|
|
|
| 7160 |
|
|
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
|
| 7161 |
|
|
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
|
| 7162 |
|
|
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
|
| 7163 |
|
|
% or the anchor name.
|
| 7164 |
|
|
% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
|
| 7165 |
|
|
% empty for anchors.
|
| 7166 |
|
|
% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
|
| 7167 |
|
|
%
|
| 7168 |
|
|
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
|
| 7169 |
|
|
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
|
| 7170 |
|
|
% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
|
| 7171 |
|
|
%
|
| 7172 |
|
|
\def\setref#1#2{%
|
| 7173 |
|
|
\pdfmkdest{#1}%
|
| 7174 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 7175 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7176 |
|
|
\atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
|
| 7177 |
|
|
\edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
|
| 7178 |
|
|
\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
|
| 7179 |
|
|
##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
|
| 7180 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7181 |
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
|
| 7182 |
|
|
\immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
|
| 7183 |
|
|
\immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
|
| 7184 |
|
|
\safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
|
| 7185 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7186 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7187 |
|
|
}
|
| 7188 |
|
|
|
| 7189 |
|
|
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
|
| 7190 |
|
|
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
|
| 7191 |
|
|
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
|
| 7192 |
|
|
% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
|
| 7193 |
|
|
%
|
| 7194 |
|
|
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| 7195 |
|
|
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| 7196 |
|
|
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| 7197 |
|
|
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
| 7198 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
| 7199 |
|
|
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
| 7200 |
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
| 7201 |
|
|
\setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
|
| 7202 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
|
| 7203 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
|
| 7204 |
|
|
% No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
| 7205 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
|
| 7206 |
|
|
% Use the node name inside the square brackets.
|
| 7207 |
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| 7208 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7209 |
|
|
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
|
| 7210 |
|
|
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
|
| 7211 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
| 7212 |
|
|
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
|
| 7213 |
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| 7214 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7215 |
|
|
\ifhavexrefs
|
| 7216 |
|
|
% We know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
| 7217 |
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
| 7218 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7219 |
|
|
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
| 7220 |
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| 7221 |
|
|
\fi%
|
| 7222 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7223 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7224 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7225 |
|
|
%
|
| 7226 |
|
|
% Make link in pdf output.
|
| 7227 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 7228 |
|
|
{\indexnofonts
|
| 7229 |
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
| 7230 |
|
|
% This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
|
| 7231 |
|
|
% etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
|
| 7232 |
|
|
\getfilename{#4}%
|
| 7233 |
|
|
%
|
| 7234 |
|
|
% See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
|
| 7235 |
|
|
{\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
|
| 7236 |
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
|
| 7237 |
|
|
%
|
| 7238 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
| 7239 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
| 7240 |
|
|
\ifnum\filenamelength>0
|
| 7241 |
|
|
goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
|
| 7242 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7243 |
|
|
goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
|
| 7244 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7245 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7246 |
|
|
\setcolor{\linkcolor}%
|
| 7247 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7248 |
|
|
%
|
| 7249 |
|
|
% Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
|
| 7250 |
|
|
% instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
|
| 7251 |
|
|
% LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
|
| 7252 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7253 |
|
|
% Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
|
| 7254 |
|
|
% include an _ in the xref name, etc.
|
| 7255 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
| 7256 |
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
| 7257 |
|
|
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
|
| 7258 |
|
|
\csname XR#1-title\endcsname
|
| 7259 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7260 |
|
|
\iffloat\Xthisreftitle
|
| 7261 |
|
|
% If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
|
| 7262 |
|
|
% print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
|
| 7263 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
|
| 7264 |
|
|
\refx{#1-snt}{}%
|
| 7265 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7266 |
|
|
\printedrefname
|
| 7267 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7268 |
|
|
%
|
| 7269 |
|
|
% if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
|
| 7270 |
|
|
% "in MANUALNAME".
|
| 7271 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
| 7272 |
|
|
\space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
| 7273 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7274 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7275 |
|
|
% node/anchor (non-float) references.
|
| 7276 |
|
|
%
|
| 7277 |
|
|
% If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
|
| 7278 |
|
|
% insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
|
| 7279 |
|
|
% not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
| 7280 |
|
|
% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
|
| 7281 |
|
|
% is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
|
| 7282 |
|
|
% is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
| 7283 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
| 7284 |
|
|
\putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
| 7285 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7286 |
|
|
% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
|
| 7287 |
|
|
% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
|
| 7288 |
|
|
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
|
| 7289 |
|
|
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
|
| 7290 |
|
|
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
|
| 7291 |
|
|
{\turnoffactive
|
| 7292 |
|
|
% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
|
| 7293 |
|
|
% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
|
| 7294 |
|
|
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
| 7295 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
|
| 7296 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7297 |
|
|
% output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
|
| 7298 |
|
|
\xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
|
| 7299 |
|
|
%
|
| 7300 |
|
|
% But we always want a comma and a space:
|
| 7301 |
|
|
,\space
|
| 7302 |
|
|
%
|
| 7303 |
|
|
% output the `page 3'.
|
| 7304 |
|
|
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
| 7305 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7306 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7307 |
|
|
\endlink
|
| 7308 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 7309 |
|
|
|
| 7310 |
|
|
% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
|
| 7311 |
|
|
% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
|
| 7312 |
|
|
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
|
| 7313 |
|
|
% one that Bob is working on :).
|
| 7314 |
|
|
%
|
| 7315 |
|
|
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
|
| 7316 |
|
|
|
| 7317 |
|
|
% Things referred to by \setref.
|
| 7318 |
|
|
%
|
| 7319 |
|
|
\def\Ynothing{}
|
| 7320 |
|
|
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
|
| 7321 |
|
|
\def\Ynumbered{%
|
| 7322 |
|
|
\ifnum\secno=0
|
| 7323 |
|
|
\putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
|
| 7324 |
|
|
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
| 7325 |
|
|
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
|
| 7326 |
|
|
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
| 7327 |
|
|
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
| 7328 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7329 |
|
|
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
| 7330 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 7331 |
|
|
}
|
| 7332 |
|
|
\def\Yappendix{%
|
| 7333 |
|
|
\ifnum\secno=0
|
| 7334 |
|
|
\putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
|
| 7335 |
|
|
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
| 7336 |
|
|
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
|
| 7337 |
|
|
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
| 7338 |
|
|
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
| 7339 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7340 |
|
|
\putwordSection@tie
|
| 7341 |
|
|
@char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
| 7342 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 7343 |
|
|
}
|
| 7344 |
|
|
|
| 7345 |
|
|
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
|
| 7346 |
|
|
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
|
| 7347 |
|
|
%
|
| 7348 |
|
|
\def\refx#1#2{%
|
| 7349 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7350 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
| 7351 |
|
|
\otherbackslash
|
| 7352 |
|
|
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
|
| 7353 |
|
|
\csname XR#1\endcsname
|
| 7354 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7355 |
|
|
\ifx\thisrefX\relax
|
| 7356 |
|
|
% If not defined, say something at least.
|
| 7357 |
|
|
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
| 7358 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 7359 |
|
|
\ifhavexrefs
|
| 7360 |
|
|
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
|
| 7361 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7362 |
|
|
\ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
| 7363 |
|
|
\global\warnedxrefstrue
|
| 7364 |
|
|
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
| 7365 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7366 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7367 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7368 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7369 |
|
|
% It's defined, so just use it.
|
| 7370 |
|
|
\thisrefX
|
| 7371 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7372 |
|
|
#2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
| 7373 |
|
|
}
|
| 7374 |
|
|
|
| 7375 |
|
|
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
|
| 7376 |
|
|
% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
|
| 7377 |
|
|
% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
|
| 7378 |
|
|
%
|
| 7379 |
|
|
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
|
| 7380 |
|
|
{% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
|
| 7381 |
|
|
% implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
|
| 7382 |
|
|
% mess up the control sequence name.
|
| 7383 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
| 7384 |
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
| 7385 |
|
|
\xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
|
| 7386 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7387 |
|
|
%
|
| 7388 |
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
|
| 7389 |
|
|
%
|
| 7390 |
|
|
% Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
|
| 7391 |
|
|
\expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
|
| 7392 |
|
|
% it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
|
| 7393 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
|
| 7394 |
|
|
\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
|
| 7395 |
|
|
%
|
| 7396 |
|
|
% Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
|
| 7397 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
|
| 7398 |
|
|
\toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
|
| 7399 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7400 |
|
|
% had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
|
| 7401 |
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
|
| 7402 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7403 |
|
|
%
|
| 7404 |
|
|
% Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
|
| 7405 |
|
|
% for later use in \listoffloats.
|
| 7406 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
|
| 7407 |
|
|
{\safexrefname}}%
|
| 7408 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7409 |
|
|
}
|
| 7410 |
|
|
|
| 7411 |
|
|
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
| 7412 |
|
|
%
|
| 7413 |
|
|
\def\tryauxfile{%
|
| 7414 |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
| 7415 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 7416 |
|
|
\readdatafile{aux}%
|
| 7417 |
|
|
\global\havexrefstrue
|
| 7418 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7419 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 7420 |
|
|
}
|
| 7421 |
|
|
|
| 7422 |
|
|
\def\setupdatafile{%
|
| 7423 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^@=\other
|
| 7424 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^A=\other
|
| 7425 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^B=\other
|
| 7426 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^C=\other
|
| 7427 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^D=\other
|
| 7428 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^E=\other
|
| 7429 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^F=\other
|
| 7430 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^G=\other
|
| 7431 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^H=\other
|
| 7432 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^K=\other
|
| 7433 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^L=\other
|
| 7434 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^N=\other
|
| 7435 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^P=\other
|
| 7436 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
| 7437 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^R=\other
|
| 7438 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^S=\other
|
| 7439 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^T=\other
|
| 7440 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^U=\other
|
| 7441 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^V=\other
|
| 7442 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^W=\other
|
| 7443 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^X=\other
|
| 7444 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
| 7445 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^[=\other
|
| 7446 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^\=\other
|
| 7447 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^]=\other
|
| 7448 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^^=\other
|
| 7449 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^_=\other
|
| 7450 |
|
|
% It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
|
| 7451 |
|
|
% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
|
| 7452 |
|
|
% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
|
| 7453 |
|
|
% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
|
| 7454 |
|
|
% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
|
| 7455 |
|
|
% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
|
| 7456 |
|
|
% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
|
| 7457 |
|
|
% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
|
| 7458 |
|
|
%
|
| 7459 |
|
|
% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
|
| 7460 |
|
|
% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
|
| 7461 |
|
|
% and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
|
| 7462 |
|
|
%
|
| 7463 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other
|
| 7464 |
|
|
%
|
| 7465 |
|
|
% Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
|
| 7466 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other
|
| 7467 |
|
|
\catcode`\[=\other
|
| 7468 |
|
|
\catcode`\]=\other
|
| 7469 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other
|
| 7470 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other
|
| 7471 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other
|
| 7472 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other
|
| 7473 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other
|
| 7474 |
|
|
\catcode`\$=\other
|
| 7475 |
|
|
\catcode`\#=\other
|
| 7476 |
|
|
\catcode`\&=\other
|
| 7477 |
|
|
\catcode`\%=\other
|
| 7478 |
|
|
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
|
| 7479 |
|
|
%
|
| 7480 |
|
|
% This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
|
| 7481 |
|
|
% characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
|
| 7482 |
|
|
% leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
|
| 7483 |
|
|
% character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
|
| 7484 |
|
|
% of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
|
| 7485 |
|
|
% should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
|
| 7486 |
|
|
% now. --karl, 15jan04.
|
| 7487 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
| 7488 |
|
|
%
|
| 7489 |
|
|
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
|
| 7490 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7491 |
|
|
\count1=128
|
| 7492 |
|
|
\def\loop{%
|
| 7493 |
|
|
\catcode\count1=\other
|
| 7494 |
|
|
\advance\count1 by 1
|
| 7495 |
|
|
\ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
|
| 7496 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7497 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7498 |
|
|
%
|
| 7499 |
|
|
% @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
|
| 7500 |
|
|
\catcode`\{=1
|
| 7501 |
|
|
\catcode`\}=2
|
| 7502 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=0
|
| 7503 |
|
|
}
|
| 7504 |
|
|
|
| 7505 |
|
|
\def\readdatafile#1{%
|
| 7506 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 7507 |
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
| 7508 |
|
|
\input\jobname.#1
|
| 7509 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 7510 |
|
|
|
| 7511 |
|
|
|
| 7512 |
|
|
\message{insertions,}
|
| 7513 |
|
|
% including footnotes.
|
| 7514 |
|
|
|
| 7515 |
|
|
\newcount \footnoteno
|
| 7516 |
|
|
|
| 7517 |
|
|
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
| 7518 |
|
|
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
| 7519 |
|
|
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
| 7520 |
|
|
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
| 7521 |
|
|
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
| 7522 |
|
|
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
| 7523 |
|
|
|
| 7524 |
|
|
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
|
| 7525 |
|
|
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
| 7526 |
|
|
|
| 7527 |
|
|
{\catcode `\@=11
|
| 7528 |
|
|
%
|
| 7529 |
|
|
% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
| 7530 |
|
|
\gdef\footnote{%
|
| 7531 |
|
|
\let\indent=\ptexindent
|
| 7532 |
|
|
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
| 7533 |
|
|
\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
| 7534 |
|
|
\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
| 7535 |
|
|
%
|
| 7536 |
|
|
% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
| 7537 |
|
|
% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
| 7538 |
|
|
\let\@sf\empty
|
| 7539 |
|
|
\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
|
| 7540 |
|
|
%
|
| 7541 |
|
|
% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
| 7542 |
|
|
\unskip
|
| 7543 |
|
|
\thisfootno\@sf
|
| 7544 |
|
|
\dofootnote
|
| 7545 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7546 |
|
|
|
| 7547 |
|
|
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
| 7548 |
|
|
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
| 7549 |
|
|
%
|
| 7550 |
|
|
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
|
| 7551 |
|
|
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
| 7552 |
|
|
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
| 7553 |
|
|
%
|
| 7554 |
|
|
\gdef\dofootnote{%
|
| 7555 |
|
|
\insert\footins\bgroup
|
| 7556 |
|
|
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
| 7557 |
|
|
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
| 7558 |
|
|
% So reset some parameters.
|
| 7559 |
|
|
\hsize=\pagewidth
|
| 7560 |
|
|
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
| 7561 |
|
|
\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
| 7562 |
|
|
\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
| 7563 |
|
|
\floatingpenalty\@MM
|
| 7564 |
|
|
\leftskip\z@skip
|
| 7565 |
|
|
\rightskip\z@skip
|
| 7566 |
|
|
\spaceskip\z@skip
|
| 7567 |
|
|
\xspaceskip\z@skip
|
| 7568 |
|
|
\parindent\defaultparindent
|
| 7569 |
|
|
%
|
| 7570 |
|
|
\smallfonts \rm
|
| 7571 |
|
|
%
|
| 7572 |
|
|
% Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
|
| 7573 |
|
|
% to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
|
| 7574 |
|
|
% hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
|
| 7575 |
|
|
% text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
|
| 7576 |
|
|
\let\noindent = \relax
|
| 7577 |
|
|
%
|
| 7578 |
|
|
% Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
|
| 7579 |
|
|
% footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
|
| 7580 |
|
|
\everypar = {\hang}%
|
| 7581 |
|
|
\textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
| 7582 |
|
|
%
|
| 7583 |
|
|
% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
| 7584 |
|
|
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
| 7585 |
|
|
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
| 7586 |
|
|
\footstrut
|
| 7587 |
|
|
\futurelet\next\fo@t
|
| 7588 |
|
|
}
|
| 7589 |
|
|
}%end \catcode `\@=11
|
| 7590 |
|
|
|
| 7591 |
|
|
% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
|
| 7592 |
|
|
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
|
| 7593 |
|
|
% would be lost.
|
| 7594 |
|
|
% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
|
| 7595 |
|
|
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
|
| 7596 |
|
|
% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
|
| 7597 |
|
|
|
| 7598 |
|
|
% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
|
| 7599 |
|
|
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
|
| 7600 |
|
|
% out prematurely.
|
| 7601 |
|
|
%
|
| 7602 |
|
|
\def\startsavinginserts{%
|
| 7603 |
|
|
\ifx \insert\ptexinsert
|
| 7604 |
|
|
\let\insert\saveinsert
|
| 7605 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7606 |
|
|
\let\checkinserts\relax
|
| 7607 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7608 |
|
|
}
|
| 7609 |
|
|
|
| 7610 |
|
|
% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
|
| 7611 |
|
|
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
|
| 7612 |
|
|
%
|
| 7613 |
|
|
\def\saveinsert#1{%
|
| 7614 |
|
|
\edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
| 7615 |
|
|
\afterassignment\next
|
| 7616 |
|
|
% swallow the left brace
|
| 7617 |
|
|
\let\temp =
|
| 7618 |
|
|
}
|
| 7619 |
|
|
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
|
| 7620 |
|
|
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
|
| 7621 |
|
|
|
| 7622 |
|
|
\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
|
| 7623 |
|
|
|
| 7624 |
|
|
\def\placesaveins#1{%
|
| 7625 |
|
|
\ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
|
| 7626 |
|
|
{\box#1}%
|
| 7627 |
|
|
}
|
| 7628 |
|
|
|
| 7629 |
|
|
% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
|
| 7630 |
|
|
{
|
| 7631 |
|
|
\def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
|
| 7632 |
|
|
\gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
|
| 7633 |
|
|
}
|
| 7634 |
|
|
|
| 7635 |
|
|
% initialization:
|
| 7636 |
|
|
\def\newsaveins #1{%
|
| 7637 |
|
|
\edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
| 7638 |
|
|
\next
|
| 7639 |
|
|
}
|
| 7640 |
|
|
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
|
| 7641 |
|
|
\csname newbox\endcsname #1%
|
| 7642 |
|
|
\expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
|
| 7643 |
|
|
\checksaveins #1}%
|
| 7644 |
|
|
}
|
| 7645 |
|
|
|
| 7646 |
|
|
% initialize:
|
| 7647 |
|
|
\let\checkinserts\empty
|
| 7648 |
|
|
\newsaveins\footins
|
| 7649 |
|
|
\newsaveins\margin
|
| 7650 |
|
|
|
| 7651 |
|
|
|
| 7652 |
|
|
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
| 7653 |
|
|
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
| 7654 |
|
|
%
|
| 7655 |
|
|
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
| 7656 |
|
|
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
| 7657 |
|
|
% undone and the next image would fail.
|
| 7658 |
|
|
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
| 7659 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 7660 |
|
|
% Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
|
| 7661 |
|
|
% doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
|
| 7662 |
|
|
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
|
| 7663 |
|
|
\input epsf.tex
|
| 7664 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7665 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 7666 |
|
|
%
|
| 7667 |
|
|
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
| 7668 |
|
|
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
| 7669 |
|
|
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
| 7670 |
|
|
work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
| 7671 |
|
|
it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
|
| 7672 |
|
|
%
|
| 7673 |
|
|
\def\image#1{%
|
| 7674 |
|
|
\ifx\epsfbox\undefined
|
| 7675 |
|
|
\ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
| 7676 |
|
|
\errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
| 7677 |
|
|
\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
| 7678 |
|
|
\global\warnednoepsftrue
|
| 7679 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7680 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7681 |
|
|
\imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
|
| 7682 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7683 |
|
|
}
|
| 7684 |
|
|
%
|
| 7685 |
|
|
% Arguments to @image:
|
| 7686 |
|
|
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
| 7687 |
|
|
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
| 7688 |
|
|
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
|
| 7689 |
|
|
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
|
| 7690 |
|
|
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
|
| 7691 |
|
|
\newif\ifimagevmode
|
| 7692 |
|
|
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
|
| 7693 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
|
| 7694 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
|
| 7695 |
|
|
% If the image is by itself, center it.
|
| 7696 |
|
|
\ifvmode
|
| 7697 |
|
|
\imagevmodetrue
|
| 7698 |
|
|
\nobreak\medskip
|
| 7699 |
|
|
% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
|
| 7700 |
|
|
% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
|
| 7701 |
|
|
% above and below.
|
| 7702 |
|
|
\nobreak\vskip\parskip
|
| 7703 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 7704 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7705 |
|
|
%
|
| 7706 |
|
|
% Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
|
| 7707 |
|
|
% environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if
|
| 7708 |
|
|
% it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
|
| 7709 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 7710 |
|
|
%
|
| 7711 |
|
|
% Output the image.
|
| 7712 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 7713 |
|
|
\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 7714 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7715 |
|
|
% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
| 7716 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
| 7717 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
| 7718 |
|
|
\epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
| 7719 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7720 |
|
|
%
|
| 7721 |
|
|
\ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image
|
| 7722 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 7723 |
|
|
|
| 7724 |
|
|
|
| 7725 |
|
|
% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
|
| 7726 |
|
|
% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
|
| 7727 |
|
|
% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
|
| 7728 |
|
|
%
|
| 7729 |
|
|
\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
|
| 7730 |
|
|
|
| 7731 |
|
|
% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
|
| 7732 |
|
|
\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
|
| 7733 |
|
|
|
| 7734 |
|
|
% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
|
| 7735 |
|
|
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
|
| 7736 |
|
|
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
|
| 7737 |
|
|
%
|
| 7738 |
|
|
% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
|
| 7739 |
|
|
% be referable.
|
| 7740 |
|
|
%
|
| 7741 |
|
|
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
|
| 7742 |
|
|
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
|
| 7743 |
|
|
%
|
| 7744 |
|
|
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
|
| 7745 |
|
|
% chapter-level command.
|
| 7746 |
|
|
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
|
| 7747 |
|
|
%
|
| 7748 |
|
|
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
|
| 7749 |
|
|
\let\thiscaption=\empty
|
| 7750 |
|
|
\let\thisshortcaption=\empty
|
| 7751 |
|
|
%
|
| 7752 |
|
|
% don't lose footnotes inside @float.
|
| 7753 |
|
|
%
|
| 7754 |
|
|
% BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
|
| 7755 |
|
|
% insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
|
| 7756 |
|
|
%
|
| 7757 |
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
| 7758 |
|
|
%
|
| 7759 |
|
|
% We can't be used inside a paragraph.
|
| 7760 |
|
|
\par
|
| 7761 |
|
|
%
|
| 7762 |
|
|
\vtop\bgroup
|
| 7763 |
|
|
\def\floattype{#1}%
|
| 7764 |
|
|
\def\floatlabel{#2}%
|
| 7765 |
|
|
\def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
|
| 7766 |
|
|
%
|
| 7767 |
|
|
\ifx\floattype\empty
|
| 7768 |
|
|
\let\safefloattype=\empty
|
| 7769 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7770 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7771 |
|
|
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
| 7772 |
|
|
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
| 7773 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
| 7774 |
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
| 7775 |
|
|
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
| 7776 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7777 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7778 |
|
|
%
|
| 7779 |
|
|
% If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
|
| 7780 |
|
|
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
| 7781 |
|
|
% We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
|
| 7782 |
|
|
% Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
|
| 7783 |
|
|
%
|
| 7784 |
|
|
\expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
|
| 7785 |
|
|
\global\advance\floatno by 1
|
| 7786 |
|
|
%
|
| 7787 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7788 |
|
|
% This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
|
| 7789 |
|
|
% XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
|
| 7790 |
|
|
% labels (which have a completely different output format) from
|
| 7791 |
|
|
% node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
|
| 7792 |
|
|
% lists of floats.
|
| 7793 |
|
|
%
|
| 7794 |
|
|
\edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
|
| 7795 |
|
|
\setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
|
| 7796 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7797 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7798 |
|
|
%
|
| 7799 |
|
|
% start with \parskip glue, I guess.
|
| 7800 |
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
| 7801 |
|
|
%
|
| 7802 |
|
|
% Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
|
| 7803 |
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
| 7804 |
|
|
}
|
| 7805 |
|
|
|
| 7806 |
|
|
% we have these possibilities:
|
| 7807 |
|
|
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
|
| 7808 |
|
|
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
|
| 7809 |
|
|
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
|
| 7810 |
|
|
% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
|
| 7811 |
|
|
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
|
| 7812 |
|
|
% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
|
| 7813 |
|
|
% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
|
| 7814 |
|
|
% @float & no caption:
|
| 7815 |
|
|
%
|
| 7816 |
|
|
\def\Efloat{%
|
| 7817 |
|
|
\let\floatident = \empty
|
| 7818 |
|
|
%
|
| 7819 |
|
|
% In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
|
| 7820 |
|
|
\ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
|
| 7821 |
|
|
%
|
| 7822 |
|
|
% If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
|
| 7823 |
|
|
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
| 7824 |
|
|
\ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
|
| 7825 |
|
|
\appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
|
| 7826 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7827 |
|
|
% the number.
|
| 7828 |
|
|
\appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
| 7829 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7830 |
|
|
%
|
| 7831 |
|
|
% Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
|
| 7832 |
|
|
% \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
|
| 7833 |
|
|
\let\captionline = \floatident
|
| 7834 |
|
|
%
|
| 7835 |
|
|
\ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
|
| 7836 |
|
|
\ifx\floatident\empty \else
|
| 7837 |
|
|
\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
|
| 7838 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7839 |
|
|
%
|
| 7840 |
|
|
% caption text.
|
| 7841 |
|
|
\appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
|
| 7842 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7843 |
|
|
%
|
| 7844 |
|
|
% If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
|
| 7845 |
|
|
% Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
|
| 7846 |
|
|
\ifx\captionline\empty \else
|
| 7847 |
|
|
\vskip.5\parskip
|
| 7848 |
|
|
\captionline
|
| 7849 |
|
|
%
|
| 7850 |
|
|
% Space below caption.
|
| 7851 |
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
| 7852 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7853 |
|
|
%
|
| 7854 |
|
|
% If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
|
| 7855 |
|
|
% after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
|
| 7856 |
|
|
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
| 7857 |
|
|
% Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
|
| 7858 |
|
|
% \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
|
| 7859 |
|
|
% caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
|
| 7860 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7861 |
|
|
\atdummies
|
| 7862 |
|
|
%
|
| 7863 |
|
|
% since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
|
| 7864 |
|
|
% is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
|
| 7865 |
|
|
% we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
|
| 7866 |
|
|
\scanexp{%
|
| 7867 |
|
|
\xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
|
| 7868 |
|
|
\ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
|
| 7869 |
|
|
\thiscaption
|
| 7870 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7871 |
|
|
\thisshortcaption
|
| 7872 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7873 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7874 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7875 |
|
|
\immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
|
| 7876 |
|
|
\ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
|
| 7877 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7878 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7879 |
|
|
\egroup % end of \vtop
|
| 7880 |
|
|
%
|
| 7881 |
|
|
% place the captured inserts
|
| 7882 |
|
|
%
|
| 7883 |
|
|
% BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
|
| 7884 |
|
|
% whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
|
| 7885 |
|
|
% float. --kasal, 26may04
|
| 7886 |
|
|
%
|
| 7887 |
|
|
\checkinserts
|
| 7888 |
|
|
}
|
| 7889 |
|
|
|
| 7890 |
|
|
% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
|
| 7891 |
|
|
%
|
| 7892 |
|
|
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
|
| 7893 |
|
|
\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
|
| 7894 |
|
|
}
|
| 7895 |
|
|
|
| 7896 |
|
|
% @caption, @shortcaption
|
| 7897 |
|
|
%
|
| 7898 |
|
|
\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
|
| 7899 |
|
|
\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
|
| 7900 |
|
|
\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
|
| 7901 |
|
|
\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
|
| 7902 |
|
|
|
| 7903 |
|
|
% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
|
| 7904 |
|
|
% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
|
| 7905 |
|
|
\def\getfloatno#1{%
|
| 7906 |
|
|
\ifx#1\relax
|
| 7907 |
|
|
% Haven't seen this figure type before.
|
| 7908 |
|
|
\csname newcount\endcsname #1%
|
| 7909 |
|
|
%
|
| 7910 |
|
|
% Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
|
| 7911 |
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
|
| 7912 |
|
|
\expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
|
| 7913 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7914 |
|
|
\let\floatno#1%
|
| 7915 |
|
|
}
|
| 7916 |
|
|
|
| 7917 |
|
|
% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
|
| 7918 |
|
|
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
|
| 7919 |
|
|
% first read the @float command.
|
| 7920 |
|
|
%
|
| 7921 |
|
|
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
| 7922 |
|
|
|
| 7923 |
|
|
% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
|
| 7924 |
|
|
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
|
| 7925 |
|
|
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
|
| 7926 |
|
|
|
| 7927 |
|
|
% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
|
| 7928 |
|
|
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
|
| 7929 |
|
|
% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
|
| 7930 |
|
|
%
|
| 7931 |
|
|
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
|
| 7932 |
|
|
%
|
| 7933 |
|
|
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
|
| 7934 |
|
|
% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
|
| 7935 |
|
|
%
|
| 7936 |
|
|
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
|
| 7937 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 7938 |
|
|
\def\iffloattype{#2}%
|
| 7939 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\floatmagic
|
| 7940 |
|
|
}
|
| 7941 |
|
|
|
| 7942 |
|
|
% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
|
| 7943 |
|
|
%
|
| 7944 |
|
|
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
|
| 7945 |
|
|
\def\floattype{#1}% floattype
|
| 7946 |
|
|
{%
|
| 7947 |
|
|
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
| 7948 |
|
|
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
| 7949 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
| 7950 |
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
| 7951 |
|
|
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
| 7952 |
|
|
}%
|
| 7953 |
|
|
%
|
| 7954 |
|
|
% \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
|
| 7955 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
|
| 7956 |
|
|
\ifhavexrefs
|
| 7957 |
|
|
% if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
|
| 7958 |
|
|
\message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
|
| 7959 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7960 |
|
|
\else
|
| 7961 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 7962 |
|
|
\leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
|
| 7963 |
|
|
\let\do=\listoffloatsdo
|
| 7964 |
|
|
\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
|
| 7965 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 7966 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 7967 |
|
|
}
|
| 7968 |
|
|
|
| 7969 |
|
|
% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
|
| 7970 |
|
|
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
|
| 7971 |
|
|
% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
|
| 7972 |
|
|
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
|
| 7973 |
|
|
%
|
| 7974 |
|
|
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
|
| 7975 |
|
|
% they won't appear in the aux file).
|
| 7976 |
|
|
%
|
| 7977 |
|
|
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
|
| 7978 |
|
|
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
|
| 7979 |
|
|
% Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
|
| 7980 |
|
|
% pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
|
| 7981 |
|
|
% page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
|
| 7982 |
|
|
% in pdf output.
|
| 7983 |
|
|
\toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
|
| 7984 |
|
|
%
|
| 7985 |
|
|
% use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
|
| 7986 |
|
|
\edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
|
| 7987 |
|
|
\writeentry
|
| 7988 |
|
|
}}
|
| 7989 |
|
|
|
| 7990 |
|
|
|
| 7991 |
|
|
\message{localization,}
|
| 7992 |
|
|
|
| 7993 |
|
|
% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
|
| 7994 |
|
|
% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
|
| 7995 |
|
|
% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
|
| 7996 |
|
|
%
|
| 7997 |
|
|
{
|
| 7998 |
|
|
\catcode`\_ = \active
|
| 7999 |
|
|
\globaldefs=1
|
| 8000 |
|
|
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
|
| 8001 |
|
|
\let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
|
| 8002 |
|
|
\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
|
| 8003 |
|
|
% Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
|
| 8004 |
|
|
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
| 8005 |
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
| 8006 |
|
|
\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
|
| 8007 |
|
|
\else
|
| 8008 |
|
|
\globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
|
| 8009 |
|
|
\input txi-#1.tex
|
| 8010 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 8011 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 8012 |
|
|
\endgroup % end raw TeX
|
| 8013 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 8014 |
|
|
%
|
| 8015 |
|
|
% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
|
| 8016 |
|
|
% try txi-de.tex.
|
| 8017 |
|
|
%
|
| 8018 |
|
|
\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
|
| 8019 |
|
|
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
| 8020 |
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
| 8021 |
|
|
\errhelp = \nolanghelp
|
| 8022 |
|
|
\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
|
| 8023 |
|
|
\else
|
| 8024 |
|
|
\globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
|
| 8025 |
|
|
\input txi-#1.tex
|
| 8026 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 8027 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 8028 |
|
|
}
|
| 8029 |
|
|
}% end of special _ catcode
|
| 8030 |
|
|
%
|
| 8031 |
|
|
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
|
| 8032 |
|
|
is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
|
| 8033 |
|
|
directory should work if nowhere else does.}
|
| 8034 |
|
|
|
| 8035 |
|
|
% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
|
| 8036 |
|
|
% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
|
| 8037 |
|
|
% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
|
| 8038 |
|
|
%
|
| 8039 |
|
|
% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
|
| 8040 |
|
|
% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
|
| 8041 |
|
|
% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
|
| 8042 |
|
|
%
|
| 8043 |
|
|
% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
|
| 8044 |
|
|
% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
|
| 8045 |
|
|
% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
|
| 8046 |
|
|
% accented characters problem.)
|
| 8047 |
|
|
%
|
| 8048 |
|
|
\catcode`@=11
|
| 8049 |
|
|
\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
|
| 8050 |
|
|
% do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
|
| 8051 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
|
| 8052 |
|
|
\message{no patterns for #1}%
|
| 8053 |
|
|
\else
|
| 8054 |
|
|
\global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
|
| 8055 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 8056 |
|
|
% but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
|
| 8057 |
|
|
\global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
|
| 8058 |
|
|
\global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
|
| 8059 |
|
|
}
|
| 8060 |
|
|
|
| 8061 |
|
|
% Helpers for encodings.
|
| 8062 |
|
|
% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
|
| 8063 |
|
|
%
|
| 8064 |
|
|
\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
|
| 8065 |
|
|
\count255=128
|
| 8066 |
|
|
\loop\ifnum\count255<256
|
| 8067 |
|
|
\global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
|
| 8068 |
|
|
\advance\count255 by 1
|
| 8069 |
|
|
\repeat
|
| 8070 |
|
|
}
|
| 8071 |
|
|
|
| 8072 |
|
|
\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
|
| 8073 |
|
|
\count255=128
|
| 8074 |
|
|
\loop\ifnum\count255<256
|
| 8075 |
|
|
\catcode\count255=#1\relax
|
| 8076 |
|
|
\advance\count255 by 1
|
| 8077 |
|
|
\repeat
|
| 8078 |
|
|
}
|
| 8079 |
|
|
|
| 8080 |
|
|
% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
|
| 8081 |
|
|
% according to the specified encoding.
|
| 8082 |
|
|
%
|
| 8083 |
|
|
\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
|
| 8084 |
|
|
% Encoding being declared for the document.
|
| 8085 |
|
|
\def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
|
| 8086 |
|
|
%
|
| 8087 |
|
|
% Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
|
| 8088 |
|
|
% to compare them with \ifx.
|
| 8089 |
|
|
\def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
|
| 8090 |
|
|
\def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
|
| 8091 |
|
|
\def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
|
| 8092 |
|
|
\def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
|
| 8093 |
|
|
\def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
|
| 8094 |
|
|
%
|
| 8095 |
|
|
\ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
|
| 8096 |
|
|
\asciichardefs
|
| 8097 |
|
|
%
|
| 8098 |
|
|
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
|
| 8099 |
|
|
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| 8100 |
|
|
\lattwochardefs
|
| 8101 |
|
|
%
|
| 8102 |
|
|
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
|
| 8103 |
|
|
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| 8104 |
|
|
\latonechardefs
|
| 8105 |
|
|
%
|
| 8106 |
|
|
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
|
| 8107 |
|
|
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| 8108 |
|
|
\latninechardefs
|
| 8109 |
|
|
%
|
| 8110 |
|
|
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
| 8111 |
|
|
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| 8112 |
|
|
\utfeightchardefs
|
| 8113 |
|
|
%
|
| 8114 |
|
|
\else
|
| 8115 |
|
|
\message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
|
| 8116 |
|
|
%
|
| 8117 |
|
|
\fi % utfeight
|
| 8118 |
|
|
\fi % latnine
|
| 8119 |
|
|
\fi % latone
|
| 8120 |
|
|
\fi % lattwo
|
| 8121 |
|
|
\fi % ascii
|
| 8122 |
|
|
}
|
| 8123 |
|
|
|
| 8124 |
|
|
% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
|
| 8125 |
|
|
% the default font encoding (OT1).
|
| 8126 |
|
|
%
|
| 8127 |
|
|
\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
|
| 8128 |
|
|
|
| 8129 |
|
|
% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
|
| 8130 |
|
|
\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
|
| 8131 |
|
|
|
| 8132 |
|
|
% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
|
| 8133 |
|
|
% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
|
| 8134 |
|
|
% macros containing the character definitions.
|
| 8135 |
|
|
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| 8136 |
|
|
%
|
| 8137 |
|
|
% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
|
| 8138 |
|
|
\def\latonechardefs{%
|
| 8139 |
|
|
\gdef^^a0{~}
|
| 8140 |
|
|
\gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
|
| 8141 |
|
|
\gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
|
| 8142 |
|
|
\gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
|
| 8143 |
|
|
\gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
|
| 8144 |
|
|
\gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
|
| 8145 |
|
|
\gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
|
| 8146 |
|
|
\gdef^^a7{\S}
|
| 8147 |
|
|
\gdef^^a8{\"{}}
|
| 8148 |
|
|
\gdef^^a9{\copyright}
|
| 8149 |
|
|
\gdef^^aa{\ordf}
|
| 8150 |
|
|
\gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
|
| 8151 |
|
|
\gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
|
| 8152 |
|
|
\gdef^^ad{\-}
|
| 8153 |
|
|
\gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
|
| 8154 |
|
|
\gdef^^af{\={}}
|
| 8155 |
|
|
%
|
| 8156 |
|
|
\gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
|
| 8157 |
|
|
\gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
|
| 8158 |
|
|
\gdef^^b2{$^2$}
|
| 8159 |
|
|
\gdef^^b3{$^3$}
|
| 8160 |
|
|
\gdef^^b4{\'{}}
|
| 8161 |
|
|
\gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
|
| 8162 |
|
|
\gdef^^b6{\P}
|
| 8163 |
|
|
%
|
| 8164 |
|
|
\gdef^^b7{$^.$}
|
| 8165 |
|
|
\gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
|
| 8166 |
|
|
\gdef^^b9{$^1$}
|
| 8167 |
|
|
\gdef^^ba{\ordm}
|
| 8168 |
|
|
%
|
| 8169 |
|
|
\gdef^^bb{\guilletright}
|
| 8170 |
|
|
\gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
|
| 8171 |
|
|
\gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
|
| 8172 |
|
|
\gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
|
| 8173 |
|
|
\gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
|
| 8174 |
|
|
%
|
| 8175 |
|
|
\gdef^^c0{\`A}
|
| 8176 |
|
|
\gdef^^c1{\'A}
|
| 8177 |
|
|
\gdef^^c2{\^A}
|
| 8178 |
|
|
\gdef^^c3{\~A}
|
| 8179 |
|
|
\gdef^^c4{\"A}
|
| 8180 |
|
|
\gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
|
| 8181 |
|
|
\gdef^^c6{\AE}
|
| 8182 |
|
|
\gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
|
| 8183 |
|
|
\gdef^^c8{\`E}
|
| 8184 |
|
|
\gdef^^c9{\'E}
|
| 8185 |
|
|
\gdef^^ca{\^E}
|
| 8186 |
|
|
\gdef^^cb{\"E}
|
| 8187 |
|
|
\gdef^^cc{\`I}
|
| 8188 |
|
|
\gdef^^cd{\'I}
|
| 8189 |
|
|
\gdef^^ce{\^I}
|
| 8190 |
|
|
\gdef^^cf{\"I}
|
| 8191 |
|
|
%
|
| 8192 |
|
|
\gdef^^d0{\DH}
|
| 8193 |
|
|
\gdef^^d1{\~N}
|
| 8194 |
|
|
\gdef^^d2{\`O}
|
| 8195 |
|
|
\gdef^^d3{\'O}
|
| 8196 |
|
|
\gdef^^d4{\^O}
|
| 8197 |
|
|
\gdef^^d5{\~O}
|
| 8198 |
|
|
\gdef^^d6{\"O}
|
| 8199 |
|
|
\gdef^^d7{$\times$}
|
| 8200 |
|
|
\gdef^^d8{\O}
|
| 8201 |
|
|
\gdef^^d9{\`U}
|
| 8202 |
|
|
\gdef^^da{\'U}
|
| 8203 |
|
|
\gdef^^db{\^U}
|
| 8204 |
|
|
\gdef^^dc{\"U}
|
| 8205 |
|
|
\gdef^^dd{\'Y}
|
| 8206 |
|
|
\gdef^^de{\TH}
|
| 8207 |
|
|
\gdef^^df{\ss}
|
| 8208 |
|
|
%
|
| 8209 |
|
|
\gdef^^e0{\`a}
|
| 8210 |
|
|
\gdef^^e1{\'a}
|
| 8211 |
|
|
\gdef^^e2{\^a}
|
| 8212 |
|
|
\gdef^^e3{\~a}
|
| 8213 |
|
|
\gdef^^e4{\"a}
|
| 8214 |
|
|
\gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
|
| 8215 |
|
|
\gdef^^e6{\ae}
|
| 8216 |
|
|
\gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
|
| 8217 |
|
|
\gdef^^e8{\`e}
|
| 8218 |
|
|
\gdef^^e9{\'e}
|
| 8219 |
|
|
\gdef^^ea{\^e}
|
| 8220 |
|
|
\gdef^^eb{\"e}
|
| 8221 |
|
|
\gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
|
| 8222 |
|
|
\gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
|
| 8223 |
|
|
\gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
|
| 8224 |
|
|
\gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
|
| 8225 |
|
|
%
|
| 8226 |
|
|
\gdef^^f0{\dh}
|
| 8227 |
|
|
\gdef^^f1{\~n}
|
| 8228 |
|
|
\gdef^^f2{\`o}
|
| 8229 |
|
|
\gdef^^f3{\'o}
|
| 8230 |
|
|
\gdef^^f4{\^o}
|
| 8231 |
|
|
\gdef^^f5{\~o}
|
| 8232 |
|
|
\gdef^^f6{\"o}
|
| 8233 |
|
|
\gdef^^f7{$\div$}
|
| 8234 |
|
|
\gdef^^f8{\o}
|
| 8235 |
|
|
\gdef^^f9{\`u}
|
| 8236 |
|
|
\gdef^^fa{\'u}
|
| 8237 |
|
|
\gdef^^fb{\^u}
|
| 8238 |
|
|
\gdef^^fc{\"u}
|
| 8239 |
|
|
\gdef^^fd{\'y}
|
| 8240 |
|
|
\gdef^^fe{\th}
|
| 8241 |
|
|
\gdef^^ff{\"y}
|
| 8242 |
|
|
}
|
| 8243 |
|
|
|
| 8244 |
|
|
% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
|
| 8245 |
|
|
\def\latninechardefs{%
|
| 8246 |
|
|
% Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
|
| 8247 |
|
|
\latonechardefs
|
| 8248 |
|
|
%
|
| 8249 |
|
|
\gdef^^a4{\euro}
|
| 8250 |
|
|
\gdef^^a6{\v S}
|
| 8251 |
|
|
\gdef^^a8{\v s}
|
| 8252 |
|
|
\gdef^^b4{\v Z}
|
| 8253 |
|
|
\gdef^^b8{\v z}
|
| 8254 |
|
|
\gdef^^bc{\OE}
|
| 8255 |
|
|
\gdef^^bd{\oe}
|
| 8256 |
|
|
\gdef^^be{\"Y}
|
| 8257 |
|
|
}
|
| 8258 |
|
|
|
| 8259 |
|
|
% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
|
| 8260 |
|
|
\def\lattwochardefs{%
|
| 8261 |
|
|
\gdef^^a0{~}
|
| 8262 |
|
|
\gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
|
| 8263 |
|
|
\gdef^^a2{\u{}}
|
| 8264 |
|
|
\gdef^^a3{\L}
|
| 8265 |
|
|
\gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
|
| 8266 |
|
|
\gdef^^a5{\v L}
|
| 8267 |
|
|
\gdef^^a6{\'S}
|
| 8268 |
|
|
\gdef^^a7{\S}
|
| 8269 |
|
|
\gdef^^a8{\"{}}
|
| 8270 |
|
|
\gdef^^a9{\v S}
|
| 8271 |
|
|
\gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
|
| 8272 |
|
|
\gdef^^ab{\v T}
|
| 8273 |
|
|
\gdef^^ac{\'Z}
|
| 8274 |
|
|
\gdef^^ad{\-}
|
| 8275 |
|
|
\gdef^^ae{\v Z}
|
| 8276 |
|
|
\gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
|
| 8277 |
|
|
%
|
| 8278 |
|
|
\gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
|
| 8279 |
|
|
\gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
|
| 8280 |
|
|
\gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
|
| 8281 |
|
|
\gdef^^b3{\l}
|
| 8282 |
|
|
\gdef^^b4{\'{}}
|
| 8283 |
|
|
\gdef^^b5{\v l}
|
| 8284 |
|
|
\gdef^^b6{\'s}
|
| 8285 |
|
|
\gdef^^b7{\v{}}
|
| 8286 |
|
|
\gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
|
| 8287 |
|
|
\gdef^^b9{\v s}
|
| 8288 |
|
|
\gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
|
| 8289 |
|
|
\gdef^^bb{\v t}
|
| 8290 |
|
|
\gdef^^bc{\'z}
|
| 8291 |
|
|
\gdef^^bd{\H{}}
|
| 8292 |
|
|
\gdef^^be{\v z}
|
| 8293 |
|
|
\gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
|
| 8294 |
|
|
%
|
| 8295 |
|
|
\gdef^^c0{\'R}
|
| 8296 |
|
|
\gdef^^c1{\'A}
|
| 8297 |
|
|
\gdef^^c2{\^A}
|
| 8298 |
|
|
\gdef^^c3{\u A}
|
| 8299 |
|
|
\gdef^^c4{\"A}
|
| 8300 |
|
|
\gdef^^c5{\'L}
|
| 8301 |
|
|
\gdef^^c6{\'C}
|
| 8302 |
|
|
\gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
|
| 8303 |
|
|
\gdef^^c8{\v C}
|
| 8304 |
|
|
\gdef^^c9{\'E}
|
| 8305 |
|
|
\gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
|
| 8306 |
|
|
\gdef^^cb{\"E}
|
| 8307 |
|
|
\gdef^^cc{\v E}
|
| 8308 |
|
|
\gdef^^cd{\'I}
|
| 8309 |
|
|
\gdef^^ce{\^I}
|
| 8310 |
|
|
\gdef^^cf{\v D}
|
| 8311 |
|
|
%
|
| 8312 |
|
|
\gdef^^d0{\DH}
|
| 8313 |
|
|
\gdef^^d1{\'N}
|
| 8314 |
|
|
\gdef^^d2{\v N}
|
| 8315 |
|
|
\gdef^^d3{\'O}
|
| 8316 |
|
|
\gdef^^d4{\^O}
|
| 8317 |
|
|
\gdef^^d5{\H O}
|
| 8318 |
|
|
\gdef^^d6{\"O}
|
| 8319 |
|
|
\gdef^^d7{$\times$}
|
| 8320 |
|
|
\gdef^^d8{\v R}
|
| 8321 |
|
|
\gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
|
| 8322 |
|
|
\gdef^^da{\'U}
|
| 8323 |
|
|
\gdef^^db{\H U}
|
| 8324 |
|
|
\gdef^^dc{\"U}
|
| 8325 |
|
|
\gdef^^dd{\'Y}
|
| 8326 |
|
|
\gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
|
| 8327 |
|
|
\gdef^^df{\ss}
|
| 8328 |
|
|
%
|
| 8329 |
|
|
\gdef^^e0{\'r}
|
| 8330 |
|
|
\gdef^^e1{\'a}
|
| 8331 |
|
|
\gdef^^e2{\^a}
|
| 8332 |
|
|
\gdef^^e3{\u a}
|
| 8333 |
|
|
\gdef^^e4{\"a}
|
| 8334 |
|
|
\gdef^^e5{\'l}
|
| 8335 |
|
|
\gdef^^e6{\'c}
|
| 8336 |
|
|
\gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
|
| 8337 |
|
|
\gdef^^e8{\v c}
|
| 8338 |
|
|
\gdef^^e9{\'e}
|
| 8339 |
|
|
\gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
|
| 8340 |
|
|
\gdef^^eb{\"e}
|
| 8341 |
|
|
\gdef^^ec{\v e}
|
| 8342 |
|
|
\gdef^^ed{\'\i}
|
| 8343 |
|
|
\gdef^^ee{\^\i}
|
| 8344 |
|
|
\gdef^^ef{\v d}
|
| 8345 |
|
|
%
|
| 8346 |
|
|
\gdef^^f0{\dh}
|
| 8347 |
|
|
\gdef^^f1{\'n}
|
| 8348 |
|
|
\gdef^^f2{\v n}
|
| 8349 |
|
|
\gdef^^f3{\'o}
|
| 8350 |
|
|
\gdef^^f4{\^o}
|
| 8351 |
|
|
\gdef^^f5{\H o}
|
| 8352 |
|
|
\gdef^^f6{\"o}
|
| 8353 |
|
|
\gdef^^f7{$\div$}
|
| 8354 |
|
|
\gdef^^f8{\v r}
|
| 8355 |
|
|
\gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
|
| 8356 |
|
|
\gdef^^fa{\'u}
|
| 8357 |
|
|
\gdef^^fb{\H u}
|
| 8358 |
|
|
\gdef^^fc{\"u}
|
| 8359 |
|
|
\gdef^^fd{\'y}
|
| 8360 |
|
|
\gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
|
| 8361 |
|
|
\gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
|
| 8362 |
|
|
}
|
| 8363 |
|
|
|
| 8364 |
|
|
% UTF-8 character definitions.
|
| 8365 |
|
|
%
|
| 8366 |
|
|
% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
|
| 8367 |
|
|
% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
|
| 8368 |
|
|
% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
|
| 8369 |
|
|
%
|
| 8370 |
|
|
\newcount\countUTFx
|
| 8371 |
|
|
\newcount\countUTFy
|
| 8372 |
|
|
\newcount\countUTFz
|
| 8373 |
|
|
|
| 8374 |
|
|
\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
|
| 8375 |
|
|
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
|
| 8376 |
|
|
%
|
| 8377 |
|
|
\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
|
| 8378 |
|
|
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
|
| 8379 |
|
|
%
|
| 8380 |
|
|
\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
|
| 8381 |
|
|
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
|
| 8382 |
|
|
|
| 8383 |
|
|
\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
|
| 8384 |
|
|
\ifx #1\relax
|
| 8385 |
|
|
\message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
|
| 8386 |
|
|
\else
|
| 8387 |
|
|
\expandafter #1%
|
| 8388 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 8389 |
|
|
}
|
| 8390 |
|
|
|
| 8391 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 8392 |
|
|
\catcode`\~13
|
| 8393 |
|
|
\catcode`\"12
|
| 8394 |
|
|
|
| 8395 |
|
|
\def\UTFviiiLoop{%
|
| 8396 |
|
|
\global\catcode\countUTFx\active
|
| 8397 |
|
|
\uccode`\~\countUTFx
|
| 8398 |
|
|
\uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
|
| 8399 |
|
|
\advance\countUTFx by 1
|
| 8400 |
|
|
\ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
|
| 8401 |
|
|
\expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
|
| 8402 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 8403 |
|
|
|
| 8404 |
|
|
\countUTFx = "C2
|
| 8405 |
|
|
\countUTFy = "E0
|
| 8406 |
|
|
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
| 8407 |
|
|
\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
|
| 8408 |
|
|
\UTFviiiLoop
|
| 8409 |
|
|
|
| 8410 |
|
|
\countUTFx = "E0
|
| 8411 |
|
|
\countUTFy = "F0
|
| 8412 |
|
|
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
| 8413 |
|
|
\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
|
| 8414 |
|
|
\UTFviiiLoop
|
| 8415 |
|
|
|
| 8416 |
|
|
\countUTFx = "F0
|
| 8417 |
|
|
\countUTFy = "F4
|
| 8418 |
|
|
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
| 8419 |
|
|
\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
|
| 8420 |
|
|
\UTFviiiLoop
|
| 8421 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 8422 |
|
|
|
| 8423 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 8424 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=12
|
| 8425 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=12
|
| 8426 |
|
|
\catcode`\.=12
|
| 8427 |
|
|
\catcode`\,=12
|
| 8428 |
|
|
\catcode`\;=12
|
| 8429 |
|
|
\catcode`\!=12
|
| 8430 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=13
|
| 8431 |
|
|
|
| 8432 |
|
|
\gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
|
| 8433 |
|
|
\countUTFz = "#1\relax
|
| 8434 |
|
|
\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
|
| 8435 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 8436 |
|
|
\parseXMLCharref
|
| 8437 |
|
|
\def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
|
| 8438 |
|
|
\csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
|
| 8439 |
|
|
\def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
|
| 8440 |
|
|
\csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
|
| 8441 |
|
|
\def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 8442 |
|
|
\csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
|
| 8443 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 8444 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 8445 |
|
|
\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
|
| 8446 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 8447 |
|
|
|
| 8448 |
|
|
\gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
|
| 8449 |
|
|
\ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
|
| 8450 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| 8451 |
|
|
\errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
|
| 8452 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
|
| 8453 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiA,%
|
| 8454 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
|
| 8455 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
|
| 8456 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiA;%
|
| 8457 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiA,%
|
| 8458 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
|
| 8459 |
|
|
\else
|
| 8460 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiA;%
|
| 8461 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiA,%
|
| 8462 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiA!%
|
| 8463 |
|
|
\parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
|
| 8464 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 8465 |
|
|
}
|
| 8466 |
|
|
|
| 8467 |
|
|
\gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
|
| 8468 |
|
|
\countUTFx = \countUTFz
|
| 8469 |
|
|
\divide\countUTFz by 64
|
| 8470 |
|
|
\countUTFy = \countUTFz
|
| 8471 |
|
|
\multiply\countUTFz by 64
|
| 8472 |
|
|
\advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
|
| 8473 |
|
|
\advance\countUTFx by 128
|
| 8474 |
|
|
\uccode `#1\countUTFx
|
| 8475 |
|
|
\countUTFz = \countUTFy}
|
| 8476 |
|
|
|
| 8477 |
|
|
\gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
|
| 8478 |
|
|
\advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
|
| 8479 |
|
|
\uccode `#3\countUTFz
|
| 8480 |
|
|
\uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
|
| 8481 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 8482 |
|
|
|
| 8483 |
|
|
\def\utfeightchardefs{%
|
| 8484 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
|
| 8485 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
|
| 8486 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
|
| 8487 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
|
| 8488 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
|
| 8489 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
|
| 8490 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
|
| 8491 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
|
| 8492 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
|
| 8493 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
|
| 8494 |
|
|
|
| 8495 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
|
| 8496 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
|
| 8497 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
|
| 8498 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
|
| 8499 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
|
| 8500 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
|
| 8501 |
|
|
|
| 8502 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
|
| 8503 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
|
| 8504 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
|
| 8505 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
|
| 8506 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
|
| 8507 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
|
| 8508 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
|
| 8509 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
|
| 8510 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
|
| 8511 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
|
| 8512 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
|
| 8513 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
|
| 8514 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
|
| 8515 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
|
| 8516 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
|
| 8517 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
|
| 8518 |
|
|
|
| 8519 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
|
| 8520 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
|
| 8521 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
|
| 8522 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
|
| 8523 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
|
| 8524 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
|
| 8525 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
|
| 8526 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
|
| 8527 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
|
| 8528 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
|
| 8529 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
|
| 8530 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
|
| 8531 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
|
| 8532 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
|
| 8533 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
|
| 8534 |
|
|
|
| 8535 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
|
| 8536 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
|
| 8537 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
|
| 8538 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
|
| 8539 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
|
| 8540 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
|
| 8541 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
|
| 8542 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
|
| 8543 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
|
| 8544 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
|
| 8545 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
|
| 8546 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
|
| 8547 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
|
| 8548 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
|
| 8549 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
|
| 8550 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
|
| 8551 |
|
|
|
| 8552 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
|
| 8553 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
|
| 8554 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
|
| 8555 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
|
| 8556 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
|
| 8557 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
|
| 8558 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
|
| 8559 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
|
| 8560 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
|
| 8561 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
|
| 8562 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
|
| 8563 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
|
| 8564 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
|
| 8565 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
|
| 8566 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
|
| 8567 |
|
|
|
| 8568 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
|
| 8569 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
|
| 8570 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
|
| 8571 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
|
| 8572 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
|
| 8573 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
|
| 8574 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
|
| 8575 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
|
| 8576 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
|
| 8577 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
|
| 8578 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
|
| 8579 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
|
| 8580 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
|
| 8581 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
|
| 8582 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
|
| 8583 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
|
| 8584 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
|
| 8585 |
|
|
|
| 8586 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
|
| 8587 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
|
| 8588 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
|
| 8589 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
|
| 8590 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
|
| 8591 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
|
| 8592 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
|
| 8593 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
|
| 8594 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
|
| 8595 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
|
| 8596 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
|
| 8597 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
|
| 8598 |
|
|
|
| 8599 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
|
| 8600 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
|
| 8601 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
|
| 8602 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
|
| 8603 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
|
| 8604 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
|
| 8605 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
|
| 8606 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
|
| 8607 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
|
| 8608 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
|
| 8609 |
|
|
|
| 8610 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
|
| 8611 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
|
| 8612 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
|
| 8613 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
|
| 8614 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
|
| 8615 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
|
| 8616 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
|
| 8617 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
|
| 8618 |
|
|
|
| 8619 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
|
| 8620 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
|
| 8621 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
|
| 8622 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
|
| 8623 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
|
| 8624 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
|
| 8625 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
|
| 8626 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
|
| 8627 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
|
| 8628 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
|
| 8629 |
|
|
|
| 8630 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
|
| 8631 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
|
| 8632 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
|
| 8633 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
|
| 8634 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
|
| 8635 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
|
| 8636 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
|
| 8637 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
|
| 8638 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
|
| 8639 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
|
| 8640 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
|
| 8641 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
|
| 8642 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
|
| 8643 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
|
| 8644 |
|
|
|
| 8645 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
|
| 8646 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
|
| 8647 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
|
| 8648 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
|
| 8649 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
|
| 8650 |
|
|
|
| 8651 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
|
| 8652 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
|
| 8653 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
|
| 8654 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
|
| 8655 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
|
| 8656 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
|
| 8657 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
|
| 8658 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
|
| 8659 |
|
|
|
| 8660 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
|
| 8661 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
|
| 8662 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
|
| 8663 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
|
| 8664 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
|
| 8665 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
|
| 8666 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
|
| 8667 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
|
| 8668 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
|
| 8669 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
|
| 8670 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
|
| 8671 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
|
| 8672 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
|
| 8673 |
|
|
|
| 8674 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
|
| 8675 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
|
| 8676 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
|
| 8677 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
|
| 8678 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
|
| 8679 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
|
| 8680 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
|
| 8681 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
|
| 8682 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
|
| 8683 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
|
| 8684 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
|
| 8685 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
|
| 8686 |
|
|
|
| 8687 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
|
| 8688 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
|
| 8689 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
|
| 8690 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
|
| 8691 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
|
| 8692 |
|
|
|
| 8693 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
|
| 8694 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
|
| 8695 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
|
| 8696 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
|
| 8697 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
|
| 8698 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
|
| 8699 |
|
|
|
| 8700 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
|
| 8701 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
|
| 8702 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
|
| 8703 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
|
| 8704 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
|
| 8705 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
|
| 8706 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
|
| 8707 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
|
| 8708 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
|
| 8709 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
|
| 8710 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
|
| 8711 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
|
| 8712 |
|
|
|
| 8713 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
|
| 8714 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
|
| 8715 |
|
|
|
| 8716 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
|
| 8717 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
|
| 8718 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
|
| 8719 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
|
| 8720 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
|
| 8721 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
|
| 8722 |
|
|
|
| 8723 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
|
| 8724 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
|
| 8725 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
|
| 8726 |
|
|
|
| 8727 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
|
| 8728 |
|
|
|
| 8729 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
|
| 8730 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
|
| 8731 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
|
| 8732 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
|
| 8733 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
|
| 8734 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
|
| 8735 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
|
| 8736 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
|
| 8737 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
|
| 8738 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
|
| 8739 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
|
| 8740 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
|
| 8741 |
|
|
|
| 8742 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
|
| 8743 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
|
| 8744 |
|
|
|
| 8745 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
|
| 8746 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
|
| 8747 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
|
| 8748 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
|
| 8749 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
|
| 8750 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
|
| 8751 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
|
| 8752 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
|
| 8753 |
|
|
|
| 8754 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
|
| 8755 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
|
| 8756 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
|
| 8757 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
|
| 8758 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
|
| 8759 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
|
| 8760 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
|
| 8761 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
|
| 8762 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
|
| 8763 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
|
| 8764 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
|
| 8765 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
|
| 8766 |
|
|
|
| 8767 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
|
| 8768 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
|
| 8769 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
|
| 8770 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
|
| 8771 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
|
| 8772 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
|
| 8773 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
|
| 8774 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
|
| 8775 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
|
| 8776 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
|
| 8777 |
|
|
|
| 8778 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
|
| 8779 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
|
| 8780 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
|
| 8781 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
|
| 8782 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
|
| 8783 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
|
| 8784 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
|
| 8785 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
|
| 8786 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
|
| 8787 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
|
| 8788 |
|
|
|
| 8789 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
|
| 8790 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
|
| 8791 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
|
| 8792 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
|
| 8793 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
|
| 8794 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
|
| 8795 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
|
| 8796 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
|
| 8797 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
|
| 8798 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
|
| 8799 |
|
|
|
| 8800 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
|
| 8801 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
|
| 8802 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
|
| 8803 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
|
| 8804 |
|
|
|
| 8805 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
|
| 8806 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
|
| 8807 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
|
| 8808 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
|
| 8809 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
|
| 8810 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
|
| 8811 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
|
| 8812 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
|
| 8813 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
|
| 8814 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
|
| 8815 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
|
| 8816 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
|
| 8817 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
|
| 8818 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
|
| 8819 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
|
| 8820 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
|
| 8821 |
|
|
|
| 8822 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
|
| 8823 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
|
| 8824 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
|
| 8825 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
|
| 8826 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
|
| 8827 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
|
| 8828 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
|
| 8829 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
|
| 8830 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
|
| 8831 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
|
| 8832 |
|
|
|
| 8833 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
|
| 8834 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
|
| 8835 |
|
|
|
| 8836 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
|
| 8837 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
|
| 8838 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
|
| 8839 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
|
| 8840 |
|
|
|
| 8841 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
|
| 8842 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
|
| 8843 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
|
| 8844 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
|
| 8845 |
|
|
|
| 8846 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
|
| 8847 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
|
| 8848 |
|
|
|
| 8849 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
|
| 8850 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
|
| 8851 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
|
| 8852 |
|
|
|
| 8853 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
|
| 8854 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
|
| 8855 |
|
|
|
| 8856 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
|
| 8857 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
|
| 8858 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
|
| 8859 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
|
| 8860 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
|
| 8861 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
|
| 8862 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
|
| 8863 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
|
| 8864 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
|
| 8865 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
|
| 8866 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
|
| 8867 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
|
| 8868 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
|
| 8869 |
|
|
|
| 8870 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
|
| 8871 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
|
| 8872 |
|
|
|
| 8873 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
|
| 8874 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
|
| 8875 |
|
|
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
|
| 8876 |
|
|
}% end of \utfeightchardefs
|
| 8877 |
|
|
|
| 8878 |
|
|
|
| 8879 |
|
|
% US-ASCII character definitions.
|
| 8880 |
|
|
\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
|
| 8881 |
|
|
\relax
|
| 8882 |
|
|
}
|
| 8883 |
|
|
|
| 8884 |
|
|
% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
|
| 8885 |
|
|
% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
|
| 8886 |
|
|
% document encoding.
|
| 8887 |
|
|
%
|
| 8888 |
|
|
\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
|
| 8889 |
|
|
|
| 8890 |
|
|
|
| 8891 |
|
|
\message{formatting,}
|
| 8892 |
|
|
|
| 8893 |
|
|
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
| 8894 |
|
|
|
| 8895 |
|
|
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
| 8896 |
|
|
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
| 8897 |
|
|
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
| 8898 |
|
|
|
| 8899 |
|
|
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
| 8900 |
|
|
\vbadness = 10000
|
| 8901 |
|
|
|
| 8902 |
|
|
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
|
| 8903 |
|
|
\hbadness = 2000
|
| 8904 |
|
|
|
| 8905 |
|
|
% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
|
| 8906 |
|
|
\widowpenalty=10000
|
| 8907 |
|
|
\clubpenalty=10000
|
| 8908 |
|
|
|
| 8909 |
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
| 8910 |
|
|
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
| 8911 |
|
|
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
| 8912 |
|
|
% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
|
| 8913 |
|
|
%
|
| 8914 |
|
|
\def\setemergencystretch{%
|
| 8915 |
|
|
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
| 8916 |
|
|
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
| 8917 |
|
|
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
| 8918 |
|
|
\else
|
| 8919 |
|
|
\emergencystretch = .15\hsize
|
| 8920 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 8921 |
|
|
}
|
| 8922 |
|
|
|
| 8923 |
|
|
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
|
| 8924 |
|
|
% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
|
| 8925 |
|
|
% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
|
| 8926 |
|
|
%
|
| 8927 |
|
|
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
|
| 8928 |
|
|
% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
|
| 8929 |
|
|
%
|
| 8930 |
|
|
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
|
| 8931 |
|
|
\voffset = #3\relax
|
| 8932 |
|
|
\topskip = #6\relax
|
| 8933 |
|
|
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
| 8934 |
|
|
%
|
| 8935 |
|
|
\vsize = #1\relax
|
| 8936 |
|
|
\advance\vsize by \topskip
|
| 8937 |
|
|
\outervsize = \vsize
|
| 8938 |
|
|
\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
|
| 8939 |
|
|
\pageheight = \vsize
|
| 8940 |
|
|
%
|
| 8941 |
|
|
\hsize = #2\relax
|
| 8942 |
|
|
\outerhsize = \hsize
|
| 8943 |
|
|
\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
| 8944 |
|
|
\pagewidth = \hsize
|
| 8945 |
|
|
%
|
| 8946 |
|
|
\normaloffset = #4\relax
|
| 8947 |
|
|
\bindingoffset = #5\relax
|
| 8948 |
|
|
%
|
| 8949 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 8950 |
|
|
\pdfpageheight #7\relax
|
| 8951 |
|
|
\pdfpagewidth #8\relax
|
| 8952 |
|
|
% if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
|
| 8953 |
|
|
% whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
|
| 8954 |
|
|
\pdfhorigin = 1 true in
|
| 8955 |
|
|
\pdfvorigin = 1 true in
|
| 8956 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 8957 |
|
|
%
|
| 8958 |
|
|
\setleading{\textleading}
|
| 8959 |
|
|
%
|
| 8960 |
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
| 8961 |
|
|
\setemergencystretch
|
| 8962 |
|
|
}
|
| 8963 |
|
|
|
| 8964 |
|
|
% @letterpaper (the default).
|
| 8965 |
|
|
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 8966 |
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| 8967 |
|
|
\textleading = 13.2pt
|
| 8968 |
|
|
%
|
| 8969 |
|
|
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
|
| 8970 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
|
| 8971 |
|
|
{\voffset}{.25in}%
|
| 8972 |
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
|
| 8973 |
|
|
{11in}{8.5in}%
|
| 8974 |
|
|
}}
|
| 8975 |
|
|
|
| 8976 |
|
|
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
|
| 8977 |
|
|
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 8978 |
|
|
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
|
| 8979 |
|
|
\textleading = 12pt
|
| 8980 |
|
|
%
|
| 8981 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
|
| 8982 |
|
|
{-.2in}{0in}%
|
| 8983 |
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
|
| 8984 |
|
|
{9.25in}{7in}%
|
| 8985 |
|
|
%
|
| 8986 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
| 8987 |
|
|
\tolerance = 700
|
| 8988 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
| 8989 |
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| 8990 |
|
|
\defbodyindent = .5cm
|
| 8991 |
|
|
}}
|
| 8992 |
|
|
|
| 8993 |
|
|
% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
|
| 8994 |
|
|
% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
|
| 8995 |
|
|
\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 8996 |
|
|
\parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
|
| 8997 |
|
|
\textleading = 12pt
|
| 8998 |
|
|
%
|
| 8999 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
|
| 9000 |
|
|
{-.2in}{-.4in}%
|
| 9001 |
|
|
{0pt}{14pt}%
|
| 9002 |
|
|
{9in}{6in}%
|
| 9003 |
|
|
%
|
| 9004 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0.25in
|
| 9005 |
|
|
\tolerance = 700
|
| 9006 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
| 9007 |
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| 9008 |
|
|
\defbodyindent = .4cm
|
| 9009 |
|
|
}}
|
| 9010 |
|
|
|
| 9011 |
|
|
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
| 9012 |
|
|
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 9013 |
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| 9014 |
|
|
\textleading = 13.2pt
|
| 9015 |
|
|
%
|
| 9016 |
|
|
% Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
|
| 9017 |
|
|
% prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
|
| 9018 |
|
|
% To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
|
| 9019 |
|
|
% \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
|
| 9020 |
|
|
% do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
|
| 9021 |
|
|
% your texinfo source file like this:
|
| 9022 |
|
|
% @tex
|
| 9023 |
|
|
% \global\normaloffset = -6mm
|
| 9024 |
|
|
% \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
|
| 9025 |
|
|
% @end tex
|
| 9026 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
|
| 9027 |
|
|
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
| 9028 |
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
| 9029 |
|
|
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
| 9030 |
|
|
%
|
| 9031 |
|
|
\tolerance = 700
|
| 9032 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
| 9033 |
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| 9034 |
|
|
\defbodyindent = 5mm
|
| 9035 |
|
|
}}
|
| 9036 |
|
|
|
| 9037 |
|
|
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
|
| 9038 |
|
|
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
|
| 9039 |
|
|
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
|
| 9040 |
|
|
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 9041 |
|
|
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
|
| 9042 |
|
|
\textleading = 12.5pt
|
| 9043 |
|
|
%
|
| 9044 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
|
| 9045 |
|
|
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
| 9046 |
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
|
| 9047 |
|
|
{210mm}{148mm}%
|
| 9048 |
|
|
%
|
| 9049 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
|
| 9050 |
|
|
\tolerance = 800
|
| 9051 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 1.2pt
|
| 9052 |
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| 9053 |
|
|
\defbodyindent = 2mm
|
| 9054 |
|
|
\tableindent = 12mm
|
| 9055 |
|
|
}}
|
| 9056 |
|
|
|
| 9057 |
|
|
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
|
| 9058 |
|
|
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 9059 |
|
|
\afourpaper
|
| 9060 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
|
| 9061 |
|
|
{\voffset}{4.6mm}%
|
| 9062 |
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
| 9063 |
|
|
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
| 9064 |
|
|
%
|
| 9065 |
|
|
% Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
|
| 9066 |
|
|
\globaldefs = 0
|
| 9067 |
|
|
}}
|
| 9068 |
|
|
|
| 9069 |
|
|
% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
|
| 9070 |
|
|
\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 9071 |
|
|
\afourpaper
|
| 9072 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
|
| 9073 |
|
|
{\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
|
| 9074 |
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
| 9075 |
|
|
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
| 9076 |
|
|
\globaldefs = 0
|
| 9077 |
|
|
}}
|
| 9078 |
|
|
|
| 9079 |
|
|
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
|
| 9080 |
|
|
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
|
| 9081 |
|
|
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
|
| 9082 |
|
|
%
|
| 9083 |
|
|
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
|
| 9084 |
|
|
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
|
| 9085 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
|
| 9086 |
|
|
\globaldefs = 1
|
| 9087 |
|
|
%
|
| 9088 |
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| 9089 |
|
|
\setleading{\textleading}%
|
| 9090 |
|
|
%
|
| 9091 |
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\relax
|
| 9092 |
|
|
\advance\dimen0 by \voffset
|
| 9093 |
|
|
%
|
| 9094 |
|
|
\dimen2 = \hsize
|
| 9095 |
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
|
| 9096 |
|
|
%
|
| 9097 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
|
| 9098 |
|
|
{\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
|
| 9099 |
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
| 9100 |
|
|
{\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
|
| 9101 |
|
|
}}
|
| 9102 |
|
|
|
| 9103 |
|
|
% Set default to letter.
|
| 9104 |
|
|
%
|
| 9105 |
|
|
\letterpaper
|
| 9106 |
|
|
|
| 9107 |
|
|
|
| 9108 |
|
|
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
| 9109 |
|
|
|
| 9110 |
|
|
% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
|
| 9111 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^? = 14
|
| 9112 |
|
|
|
| 9113 |
|
|
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
| 9114 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other
|
| 9115 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other
|
| 9116 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other
|
| 9117 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other
|
| 9118 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other
|
| 9119 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other
|
| 9120 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other
|
| 9121 |
|
|
\catcode`\+=\other
|
| 9122 |
|
|
\catcode`\$=\other
|
| 9123 |
|
|
\def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
| 9124 |
|
|
\def\normaltilde{~}
|
| 9125 |
|
|
\def\normalcaret{^}
|
| 9126 |
|
|
\def\normalunderscore{_}
|
| 9127 |
|
|
\def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
| 9128 |
|
|
\def\normalless{<}
|
| 9129 |
|
|
\def\normalgreater{>}
|
| 9130 |
|
|
\def\normalplus{+}
|
| 9131 |
|
|
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
|
| 9132 |
|
|
|
| 9133 |
|
|
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
|
| 9134 |
|
|
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
|
| 9135 |
|
|
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
| 9136 |
|
|
%
|
| 9137 |
|
|
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
| 9138 |
|
|
% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
| 9139 |
|
|
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
| 9140 |
|
|
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
| 9141 |
|
|
%
|
| 9142 |
|
|
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
| 9143 |
|
|
|
| 9144 |
|
|
% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
|
| 9145 |
|
|
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
|
| 9146 |
|
|
% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
|
| 9147 |
|
|
% this is not a problem.
|
| 9148 |
|
|
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
| 9149 |
|
|
|
| 9150 |
|
|
% Turn off all special characters except @
|
| 9151 |
|
|
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
|
| 9152 |
|
|
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
| 9153 |
|
|
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
| 9154 |
|
|
|
| 9155 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\active
|
| 9156 |
|
|
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
|
| 9157 |
|
|
\let"=\activedoublequote
|
| 9158 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\active
|
| 9159 |
|
|
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
|
| 9160 |
|
|
\chardef\hat=`\^
|
| 9161 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\active
|
| 9162 |
|
|
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
|
| 9163 |
|
|
|
| 9164 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
| 9165 |
|
|
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
| 9166 |
|
|
\let\realunder=_
|
| 9167 |
|
|
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
|
| 9168 |
|
|
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
|
| 9169 |
|
|
|
| 9170 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\active
|
| 9171 |
|
|
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
|
| 9172 |
|
|
\chardef \less=`\<
|
| 9173 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\active
|
| 9174 |
|
|
\def<{{\tt \less}}
|
| 9175 |
|
|
\chardef \gtr=`\>
|
| 9176 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\active
|
| 9177 |
|
|
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
|
| 9178 |
|
|
\catcode`\+=\active
|
| 9179 |
|
|
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
| 9180 |
|
|
\catcode`\$=\active
|
| 9181 |
|
|
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
|
| 9182 |
|
|
|
| 9183 |
|
|
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
| 9184 |
|
|
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
| 9185 |
|
|
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
|
| 9186 |
|
|
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
|
| 9187 |
|
|
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
|
| 9188 |
|
|
|
| 9189 |
|
|
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
|
| 9190 |
|
|
% parsing them.
|
| 9191 |
|
|
\def\turnoffactive{%
|
| 9192 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
| 9193 |
|
|
\otherbackslash
|
| 9194 |
|
|
}
|
| 9195 |
|
|
|
| 9196 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=0
|
| 9197 |
|
|
|
| 9198 |
|
|
% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
|
| 9199 |
|
|
% as in \char`\\.
|
| 9200 |
|
|
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
|
| 9201 |
|
|
\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
|
| 9202 |
|
|
|
| 9203 |
|
|
% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
|
| 9204 |
|
|
% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
|
| 9205 |
|
|
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
|
| 9206 |
|
|
|
| 9207 |
|
|
% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
|
| 9208 |
|
|
% in fixed width font.
|
| 9209 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active
|
| 9210 |
|
|
@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
|
| 9211 |
|
|
% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
|
| 9212 |
|
|
% @let \ = @normalbackslash
|
| 9213 |
|
|
|
| 9214 |
|
|
% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
|
| 9215 |
|
|
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
|
| 9216 |
|
|
% catcode other.
|
| 9217 |
|
|
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
|
| 9218 |
|
|
@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
|
| 9219 |
|
|
|
| 9220 |
|
|
% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
|
| 9221 |
|
|
% the literal character `\'.
|
| 9222 |
|
|
%
|
| 9223 |
|
|
@def@normalturnoffactive{%
|
| 9224 |
|
|
@let\=@normalbackslash
|
| 9225 |
|
|
@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
| 9226 |
|
|
@let~=@normaltilde
|
| 9227 |
|
|
@let^=@normalcaret
|
| 9228 |
|
|
@let_=@normalunderscore
|
| 9229 |
|
|
@let|=@normalverticalbar
|
| 9230 |
|
|
@let<=@normalless
|
| 9231 |
|
|
@let>=@normalgreater
|
| 9232 |
|
|
@let+=@normalplus
|
| 9233 |
|
|
@let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
|
| 9234 |
|
|
@markupsetuplqdefault
|
| 9235 |
|
|
@markupsetuprqdefault
|
| 9236 |
|
|
@unsepspaces
|
| 9237 |
|
|
}
|
| 9238 |
|
|
|
| 9239 |
|
|
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
|
| 9240 |
|
|
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
|
| 9241 |
|
|
@otherifyactive
|
| 9242 |
|
|
|
| 9243 |
|
|
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
| 9244 |
|
|
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
| 9245 |
|
|
% a backslash.
|
| 9246 |
|
|
%
|
| 9247 |
|
|
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
|
| 9248 |
|
|
@global@let\ = @eatinput
|
| 9249 |
|
|
|
| 9250 |
|
|
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
|
| 9251 |
|
|
% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
|
| 9252 |
|
|
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
|
| 9253 |
|
|
% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
|
| 9254 |
|
|
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
| 9255 |
|
|
%
|
| 9256 |
|
|
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
|
| 9257 |
|
|
@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
|
| 9258 |
|
|
@catcode`+=@active
|
| 9259 |
|
|
@catcode`@_=@active
|
| 9260 |
|
|
}
|
| 9261 |
|
|
|
| 9262 |
|
|
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
| 9263 |
|
|
@escapechar = `@@
|
| 9264 |
|
|
|
| 9265 |
|
|
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
|
| 9266 |
|
|
@catcode`@& = @other
|
| 9267 |
|
|
@catcode`@# = @other
|
| 9268 |
|
|
@catcode`@% = @other
|
| 9269 |
|
|
|
| 9270 |
|
|
@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
|
| 9271 |
|
|
@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
|
| 9272 |
|
|
@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
|
| 9273 |
|
|
@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
|
| 9274 |
|
|
@catcode`@'=@active
|
| 9275 |
|
|
@catcode`@`=@active
|
| 9276 |
|
|
@markupsetuplqdefault
|
| 9277 |
|
|
@markupsetuprqdefault
|
| 9278 |
|
|
|
| 9279 |
|
|
@c Local variables:
|
| 9280 |
|
|
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
|
| 9281 |
|
|
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
|
| 9282 |
|
|
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
|
| 9283 |
|
|
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
|
| 9284 |
|
|
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
|
| 9285 |
|
|
@c End:
|
| 9286 |
|
|
|
| 9287 |
|
|
@c vim:sw=2:
|
| 9288 |
|
|
|
| 9289 |
|
|
@ignore
|
| 9290 |
|
|
arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
|
| 9291 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
